2011 Nissan Juke Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2011-juke

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 347 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2011 Juke Owner's Manual
OM1E-0F15U1
Table of Contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (2,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 23

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of

driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide explains details

about maintaining and servicing your ve-

hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer

Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s lemon

law.

Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best.

When you require any service or have any

questions, we will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available to us.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s

Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with

controls and maintenance requirements, assist-

ing you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMA-

TION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

.NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.

.ALWAYS observe posted speed lim-

its and never drive too fast for

conditions.

.ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle

features or taking other actions that

could distract you.

.ALWAYS use your seat belts and

appropriate child restraint systems.

Pre-teen children should be seated

in the rear seat.

.ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety

features to all occupants of the

vehicle.

.ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man-

ual for important safety information.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger

car because it has a higher center of

gravity for off-road use. As with other

vehicles with features of this type, failure

to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-

road driving precautions”, “Avoiding colli-

sion and rollover” and “Driving safety

precautions” in the “5. Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate

governmental regulations. In addition,

damage or performance problems result-

ing from modification may not be covered

under NISSAN warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all

options available on this model. Therefore,

you may find some information that does

not apply to your vehicle.

Foreword

Information Provided by:

Black plate (3,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications or design at any time without

notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or

serious personal injury. To avoid or

reduce the risk, the procedures must

be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage to

your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed care-

fully.

SIC0697

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not

do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to the front

of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and certain vehicle components

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive

harm. In addition, certain fluids con-

tained in vehicles and certain products

of component wear contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer and birth defects

or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-

SORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material - special handling may

apply, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Information Provided by:

Black plate (4,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Bluetooth®is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.

and licensed to Visteon Corpora-

tion.

XM Radio®requires subscrip-

tion, sold separately. Not avail-

able in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.

For more information, visit www.

xmradio.com.

C2010 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or

by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-

copying, recording or otherwise, without the

prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,

Ltd.

Information Provided by:

Black plate (5,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you

would like to provide NISSAN directly with

comments or questions, please contact the

NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using

our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for

the following information:

— Your name, address, and telephone number

— Vehicle identification number (attached to

the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

— Date of purchase

— Current odometer reading

— Your NISSAN dealer’s name

— Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE

PROGRAM

Information Provided by:

Black plate

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Information Provided by:

Black plate (1,1)

Table of

Contents

Model "F15-D" Edited: 2010/ 6/ 24

Illustrated table of contents 0

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

Index 10

Information Provided by:

Black plate

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Information Provided by:

Black plate (1,1)

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) ................................................... 0-2

Exterior front ..................................................... 0-3

Exterior rear ...................................................... 0-4

Passenger compartment ...................................... 0-5

Cockpit............................................................ 0-6

Instrument panel ................................................ 0-7

Meters and gauges............................................. 0-8

Engine compartment ........................................... 0-9

MR16DDT engine .......................................... 0-9

Warning and indicator lights ............................... 0-10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Information Provided by:

Black plate (4,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSI0765

1. Rear headrests (Page 1-8)

2. Child restraint anchor points (for top tether strap

child restraint) (P.1-31)

3. Head restraints (P.1-4)

— Front-seat Active Head Restraints (P.1-7)

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental

air bags (P.1-35)

5. Seat belts (P.1-10)

6. Front seats (P.1-3)

7. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-35)

8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

system* (P.1-19)

9. Rear seats (P.1-4)

— Child restraints (P.1-18)

10. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air

bags (P.1-35)

11. Seat belt with pretensioners (P.1-47)

12. Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors)

— Advanced Air Bag System (P.1-41)

13. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-42)

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (5,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSI0766

1. Hood (P.3-21)

2. Windshield wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-31)

— Blade replacement (P.8-16)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-12)

3. Clearance lights, turn signal lights and front side

marker lights

— Switch operation (P.2-34)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-25)

4. Moonroof* (P.2-47)

5. Side turn signal lights

— Switch operation (P.2-37)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)

6. Power windows (P.2-44)

7. Outside mirrors (P.3-26)

8. License plate installation (P.9-11)

9. Recovery hook (P.6-13)

10. Fog lights*

— Switch operation (P.2-37)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)

11. Headlights

— Switch operation (P.2-34)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-25)

12. Tires

— Wheels and tires (P.8-27, P.9-7)

— Flat tire (P.6-2)

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(P.2-14, P.5-3)

13. Doors

— Keys (P.3-2)

— Door locks (P.3-4)

— Remote keyless entry system* (P.3-7)

— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-10)

— Security system (P.2-28)

*: if so equipped

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (6,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSI0767

1. Lift gate (P.3-22)

— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-10)

2. Rear window wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-32)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-12)

3. High-mounted stop light (P.8-24)

4. Antenna (P.4-50)

— Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-22)

5. Rear window defroster (P.2-33)

6. Fuel-filler door

— Operation (P.3-23)

— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)

7. Rearview camera* (P.4-9)

8. Rear combination lights

— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)

9. Child safety rear door lock (P.3-6)

*: if so equipped

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (7,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSI0768

1. Cargo area

— Cargo cover* (P.2-43)

— Cargo light (P.8-24)

2. Coat hook (P.2-43)

3. Sun visors (P.3-25)

4. Moonroof switch* (P.2-47)

5. Room light and map lights (P.2-49)

6. Inside rearview mirror (P.3-26)

7. Door armrest

— Power window switch (P.2-44)

— Power door lock switch (P.3-5)

*: if so equipped

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (8,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSI0769

1. Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-26)

2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight (P.2-34)

— Turn signal light (P.2-37)

— Fog light* (P.2-37)

3. Steering wheel

— Electric power steering system (P.5-34)

— Horn (P.2-38)

— Driver’s supplemental air bag (P.1-35)

4. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-31)

5. Selector lever or shift lever

— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

(P.5-16)

— Manual Transmission (MT) (P.5-20)

6. Fuse box cover (P.8-20)

7. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P.5-37)

8. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) switch* (P.5-29)

9. Tilting steering wheel lever (P.3-25)

10. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

— Audio control (P.4-49)

— Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System control

(P.4-52)

11. Ignition switch (models without Intelligent Key

system) (P.5-9)

12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)

— Cruise control switches (P.5-26)

13. Heated seat switch* (P.2-39)

*: if so equipped

COCKPIT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (9,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSI0770

1. Meters and gauges (P.2-4)

2. Center ventilator (P.4-13)

3. Audio system* or Navigation system** (P.4-21)

— Clock* (P.2-40)

4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-37)

5. Integrated Control System*

— Clock (P.2-21)

— Drive mode (P.5-22)

— Heater and air conditioner control (P.4-14)

— Defroster switch (P.2-33)

5. Heater and air conditioner control (models without

Integrated Control System) (P.4-14)

— Defroster switch (P.2-33)

6. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-35)

7. Side ventilator (P.4-13)

8. Fuel-filler door release handle (P.3-23)

9. Hood release handle (P.3-21)

10. Push-button ignition switch (models with Intelli-

gent Key system) (P.5-11)

11. AUX/USB connector* (P.4-25)

12. Parking brake (P.5-26)

13. Cup holder (P.2-41)

14. Power outlet (P.2-41)

15. Glove box (P.2-43)

*: if so equipped

**: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (10,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4601

1. Tachometer (P.2-6)

2. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-6)

3. Vehicle information display (P.2-8)

— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-5)

— Trip computer (P.2-8)

— Outside air temperature (P.2-8)

4. Fuel gauge (P.2-7)

5. Speedometer (P.2-5)

6. Warning/indicator lights (P.2-11)

7. Instrument brightness control knob (P.2-36)

8. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-

tion indicator* (P.2-8)

9. RESET switch for trip odometer (P.2-5)/Trip

computer mode switch (P.2-8)

*: if so equipped

METERS AND GAUGES

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (11,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI2639

MR16DDT ENGINE

1. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-8)

2. Radiator filler cap (P.8-7)

— Vehicle overheat (P.6-9)

3. Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir (P.8-11)

4. Air cleaner (P.8-16)

5. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-12)

6. Engine drive belt location (P.8-14)

7. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-8)

8. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-7)

9. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-19)

10. Battery (P.8-12)

— Jump starting (P.6-7)

*: for Manual Transmission (MT) models

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (12,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Warning

light Name Page

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning

light (yellow) (AWD model) 2-12

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light 2-12

Brake warning light 2-12

Charge warning light 2-13

Door open warning light 2-13

Electric power steering warning

light 2-13

Engine oil pressure warning

light 2-13

Intelligent Key system warning

light* 2-13

Low fuel warning light 2-14

Low tire pressure warning light 2-14

Warning

light Name Page

Low washer fluid warning light* 2-15

P position selecting warning

light* 2-15

Seat belt warning light 2-15

Supplemental air bag warning

light 2-15

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light 2-16

Indicator

light Name Page

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indica-

tor light (green) (AWD model) 2-16

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)-V indi-

cator light (green) (AWD mod-

el)

2-16

Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) indicator light* 2-16

Front passenger air bag status

light 2-17

Cruise indicator light* 2-16

Indicator

light Name Page

Engine start operation indicator

light* 2-17

High beam indicator light 2-17

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) 2-17

Security indicator light* 2-18

Low beam indicator light 2-18

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights 2-18

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light 2-18

*: if so equipped

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (4,1)

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Seats .............................................................. 1-2

Front seats ................................................... 1-3

Rear seats.................................................... 1-4

Head restraints .............................................. 1-4

Adjustable headrests (if so equipped) ................. 1-8

Seat belts ...................................................... 1-10

Precautions on seat belt usage ....................... 1-10

Pregnant women.......................................... 1-13

Injured persons............................................ 1-13

Three-point type seat belt .............................. 1-13

Seat belt extenders....................................... 1-16

Seat belt maintenance................................... 1-16

Child safety .................................................... 1-16

Infants ....................................................... 1-17

Small children ............................................. 1-17

Larger children ............................................ 1-17

Child restraints ................................................ 1-18

Precautions on child restraints......................... 1-18

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System

(LATCH) .................................................... 1-19

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

LATCH ...................................................... 1-21

Rear-facing child restraint installation using the

seat belts ................................................... 1-23

Forward-facing child restraint installation using

LATCH ...................................................... 1-26

Forward-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts .............................................. 1-28

Installing top tether strap ............................... 1-31

Booster seats.............................................. 1-31

Supplemental restraint system............................. 1-35

Precautions on supplemental restraint system ..... 1-35

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats) ................................................ 1-41

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag systems ......................... 1-45

Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ......... 1-47

Supplemental air bag warning labels................. 1-48

Supplemental air bag warning light................... 1-48

Repair and replacement procedure................... 1-49

Information Provided by:

Black plate (16,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0133

WARNING

.Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined. This

can be dangerous. The shoulder belt

will not be against your body. In an

accident, you could be thrown into it

and receive neck or other serious

injuries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

.For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat

properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON

SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this

section.

.After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely

locked.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

.The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when

the passenger sits well back and

straight up in the seat. If the seat-

back is reclined, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and being injured

is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

SEATS

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (17,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0792

FRONT SEATS

Front manual seat adjustment

Forward and backward:

Pull the lever *

1up and hold it while you slide

the seat forward or backward to the desired

position. Release the lever to lock the seat in

position.

Reclining:

To recline the seatback, pull the lever *

2up and

lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull

the lever up and lean your body forward. Release

the lever to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback

can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in

the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with

the parking brake fully applied.

SSS1129

Seat lifter (for driver’s seat):

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to

adjust the seat height until the desired position

is achieved.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (18,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS1142

REAR SEATS

Folding

Before folding the rear seats:

Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks on

the side wall. (See “Seat belt hooks” later in this

section.)

To fold the seat back, pull the adjusting knob

To return the seatback to the seating position, lift

up each seatback and push it to the upright

position until it is latched.

CAUTION

When folding or returning the

seatback(s) to the upright position, to

avoid injury to yourself and others:

.Make sure that the seat path is clear

before moving the seat.

WARNING

.Do not fold down the rear seats

when occupants are in the rear seat

area or any objects are on the rear

seats.

.Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seats

when they are in the fold-down

position. Use of these areas by

passengers without proper re-

straints could result in serious injury

in an accident or sudden stop.

.Properly secure all cargo with ropes

or straps to help prevent it from

sliding or shifting. Do not place

cargo higher than the seatbacks. In

a sudden stop or collision, unse-

cured cargo could cause personal

injury.

.When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched

position. If they are not completely

secured, passengers may be injured

in an accident or sudden stop.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other

vehicle safety systems. They may pro-

vide additional protection against injury

in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the

head restraints properly, as specified in

this section. Check the adjustment after

someone else uses the seat. Do not

attach anything to the head restraint

stalks or remove the head restraint. Do

not use the seat if the head restraint

has been removed. If the head restraint

was removed, reinstall and properly

adjust the head restraint before an

occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions

can reduce the effectiveness of the

head restraints. This may increase the

risk of serious injury or death in a

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (19,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

collision.

SSS1019

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraints. The head re-

straints are adjustable.

Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a head restraint.

SSS0992

Components

1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (20,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0997

Adjustment

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level

with the center of your ears.

SSS0993

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

SSS0994

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint down.

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (21,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0995

Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the

adjustable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest

position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure

place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint before an occupant uses the

seating position.

SSS0996

Install

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint

is facing the correct direction. The stalk with

the adjustment notches *

1must be in-

stalled in the hole with the lock knob *

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an

occupant uses the seating position.

SSS0508

Front-seat Active Head Restraints

The Active Head Restraint moves forward

utilizing the force that the seatback receives

from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The

movement of the head restraint helps support

the occupant’s head by reducing its backward

movement and helping absorb some of the

forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-

sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said

that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original positions.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (22,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as

described in this section.

ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTS (if so

equipped)

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They

may provide additional protection

against injury in certain rear end colli-

sions. Adjust the headrest properly, as

specifiedinthissection.Checkthe

adjustment after someone else uses

the seat. Do not attach anything to the

adjustable headrest stalks or remove

the adjustable headrest. Do not use the

seat if the adjustable headrest has

been removed. If the adjustable head-

rest was removed, reinstall and prop-

erly adjust the headrest before an

occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions

can reduce the effectiveness of the

adjustable headrests. This may in-

creasetheriskofseriousinjuryor

death in a collision.

SSS1143

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with adjustable headrests.

Indicates the seating position is equipped

with an adjustable headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped

with a head restraint or adjustable headrest.

SSS1034

Components

1. Adjustable headrest

2. Adjustment notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (23,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS1035

Adjustment

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the lock

position.

SSS1036

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the headrest down.

SSS1037

Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the

adjustable headrests.

Before removing the headrests, fold down the

seatback. (See “REAR SEATS” earlier in this

section.)

1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the headrest from the seat.

4. Store the headrest properly in a secure

place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrest

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (24,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

SSS1038

Install

Before installing the headrests, fold down the

seatback. (See “REAR SEATS” earlier in this

section.)

1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in

the seat. Make sure that the headrest is

facing the correct direction. The stalk with

the adjustment notch *

1must be installed

in the hole with the lock knob *

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrest before an

occupant uses the seating position.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well

back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your

chances of being injured or killed in an accident

and/or the severity of injury may be greatly

reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and

all of your passengers to buckle up every time

you drive, even if your seating position includes a

supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SEAT BELTS

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (25,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0136

SSS0134

SSS0016

SSS0014

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (26,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

.Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat and,

if appropriate, in a child restraint.

.The seat belt should be properly

adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do

so may reduce the effectiveness of

the entire restraint system and in-

crease the chance or severity of

injury in an accident. Serious injury

or death can occur if the seat belt is

not worn properly.

.Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your

chest. Never put the belt behind

your back, under your arm or across

your neck. The belt should be away

from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder.

.Position the lap belt as low and

snug as possible AROUND THE

HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt

worn too high could increase the

risk of internal injuries in an acci-

dent.

.Be sure the seat belt tongue is

securely fastened to the proper

buckle.

.Do not wear the seat belt inside out

or twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

.Do not allow more than one person

to use the same seat belt.

.Never carry more people in the

vehicle than there are seat belts.

.If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and

all seat belts fastened, it may in-

dicate a malfunction in the system.

Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

.No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do

not modify the seat belt, add mate-

rial, or install devices that may

change the seat belt routing or

tension. Doing so may affect the

operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the

seat belt system may result in

serious personal injury.

.Once a seat belt pretensioner has

activated, it cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. See a NISSAN dealer.

.Removal and installation of the

pretensioner system components

should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

.All seat belt assemblies, including

retractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN

recommends that all seat belt as-

semblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was

minor and the belts show no da-

mage and continue to operate prop-

erly. Seat belt assemblies not in use

during a collision should also be

inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is

noted.

.All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the

restraint manufacturer’s inspection

instructions and replacement re-

commendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are

damaged.

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (27,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as

possible around the hips, not the waist. Place

the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across

your chest. Never put the lap/shoulder belt over

your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for

specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with

your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

.Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

.Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined. This

can be dangerous. The shoulder belt

will not be against your body. In an

accident, you could be thrown into it

and receive neck or other serious

injuries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

.For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat belt

properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in this

section.)

SSS0292

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until

you hear and feel the latch engage.

.The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

belt to move and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

.If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (28,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0290

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions three-point seat belts have two modes

of operation:

.Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

.Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

allows the seat belt to extend and retract to

allow the driver and passengers some freedom

of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat

belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for

child restraint installation.

When ALR mode is activated the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional

information, see “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in

this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is

activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be

certain that seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

SSS0326

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the

buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (29,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0351A

Shoulder belt height adjustment (for front

seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. (See

“PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE”

earlier in this section.)

To adjust, pull the adjustment button *

1, and

then move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position *

2, so that the belt passes

over the center of the shoulder. The belt should

be away from your face and neck, but not falling

off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment

button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into

position.

WARNING

.After adjustment, release the ad-

justment button and try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down

to make sure it is securely fixed in

position.

.The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

best for you. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident. SSS1138

Seat belt hooks

When the rear seat belts are not in use and

when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear

seat belts on the seat belt hooks.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (30,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with

the installed seat belts is available that can be

purchased. The extender adds approximately 8

in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either

the driver or front passenger seating position.

See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with

purchasing an extender if an extender is

required.

WARNING

.Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

.Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal

injury in the event of an accident.

.Never use seat belt extenders to

install child restraints. If the child

restraint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured in a

collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

.To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

.If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

.Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt

assembly should be replaced.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

.Rear-facing child restraint

.Forward-facing child restraint

.Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-

facing child restraints. Forward-facing child

restraints are available for children who outgrow

rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1

year old. Booster seats are used to help position

a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly. The shoulder belt may

CHILD SAFETY

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (31,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 2/ 21

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly

fitting seat belt could cause serious or

fatal injury. Always use appropriate

child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. See

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle

by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and

Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle

seat belt. See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in

this section for more information.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. See “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM” later in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing

child restraint as long as possible up to the

height or weight limit of the child restraint.

Forward-facing child restraints are available for

children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints

and are at least 1 year old. Refer to the

manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommendations.

NISSAN recommends that small children be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits your

vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraints

should be seated and restrained by the seat

belts which are provided. The seat belt may not

fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5

cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and

80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to

obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a

commercially availableboosterseatifthe

shoulder belt fits close to the face or neck or if

the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the

abdomen. The booster seat should raise the

child so that the shoulder belt is properly

positioned across the top, middle portion of

the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips.

A booster seat can only be used in seating

positions that have a three-point type seat belt.

The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt

is no longer on or near the face and neck, use

the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo area. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in a sudden stop or

collision.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (32,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0099

SSS0100

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

.Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use and in-

stallation of child restraints could

result in serious injury or death of a

child or other passengers in a

sudden stop or collision:

— The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always

follow all of the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for

installation and use.

— Infants and children should

never be held on anyone’s lap.

Even the strongest adult cannot

resist the forces of a collision.

— Do not put a seat belt around

both a child and another pas-

senger.

— NISSAN recommends that all

child restraints be installed in

the rear seat. Studies show that

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat. If you must

install a forward-facing child

restraint in the front seat, see

“FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS” later in this

section.

— Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, never install a

rear-facing child restraint in the

front seat. An inflating air bag

could seriously injure or kill a

child. A rear-facing child re-

straint must only be used in the

rear seat.

—Besuretopurchaseachild

restraint that will fit the child

and vehicle. Some child re-

straints may not fit properly in

your vehicle.

— Child restraint anchor points are

designed to withstand loads

from child restraints that are

properly fitted.

— Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts or harnesses.

— A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat.

— Keep seatbacks as upright as

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (33,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

possible after fitting the child

restraint.

— Infants and children should al-

ways be placed in an appropri-

ate child restraint while in the

vehicle.

.When the child restraint is not in

use, keep it secured with the LATCH

system or a seat belt. In a sudden

stop or collision, loose objects can

injure occupants or damage the

vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-

dren) system. Some child restraints include rigid

or webbing-mounted attachments that can be

connected to these anchors.

For details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren System (LATCH)” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and small children of various sizes. When

selecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

.Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

.Check the child restraint in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

.If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child

restraints be secured to the designated

anchor point on the vehicle.

SSS0801

LATCH label location

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

System (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with the LATCH (Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system

compatible child restraints. This system may

also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX

compatible system. With this system, you do not

have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the

child restraint.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (34,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

— Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration.

— Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using

the LATCH lower anchors. The child

restraint will not be secured prop-

erly.

— Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower

anchor area. Feel to make sure

there are no obstructions over the

anchors such as seat belt webbing

or seat cushion material. The child

restraint will not be secured prop-

erly if the lower anchors are ob-

structed.

SSS0637

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of

the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH anchors.

SSS0643

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH lower

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this

system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint. Check your

child restraint for a label stating that it is

compatible with LATCH. This information may

also be in the instructions provided by the child

restraint manufacturer.

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (35,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0644

LATCH rigid attachment

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

SSS1136

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the back side of

the seatbacks.

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing child restraints with the LATCH

lower anchor attachments or seat belts.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap child restraint on the rear

seat, consult a NISSAN dealer for details.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-

STALLATION USING LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before

installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (36,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0648

Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is

properly attached to the lower anchors.

SSS0649

Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

SSS0639

Rear-facing — step 3

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (37,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0650

Rear-facing — step 4

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the child restraint

near the LATCH attachment path. The child

restraint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH

attachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint or try

installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if

applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 4.

SSS0100

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-

STALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front

passenger air bag. See “Front passen-

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (38,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

ger air bag and status light” later in this

section.

SSS0100

Rear-facing — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“CHILD SAFETY” earlier in this section and

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section

before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear

seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

SSS0654

Rear-facing — step 2

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for belt routing.

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (39,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0655

Rear-facing — step 3

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0656

Rear-facing — step 4

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

SSS0657

Rear-facing — step 5

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

pulling up on the seat belt.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (40,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0658

Rear-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the child restraint

near the seat belt path. The child restraint

should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),

from side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten

the seat belt as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1

through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before

installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

SSS0645

Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is

properly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this

section. Do not install child restraints that

require the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a top

tether anchor.

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (41,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0646

Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 3

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrest

to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the

headrest is removed, store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest

when the child restraint is removed.

See “Adjustable headrest” in this section for

headrest adjustment information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable headrest and it is interfering with

the proper child restraint fit, try another

seating position or a different child restraint.

SSS0647

Forward-facing — step 4

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

SSS0638

Forward-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the child restraint

near the LATCH attachment path. The child

restraint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH

attachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (42,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

through 6.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front

passenger air bag. See “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” later in this

section.

SSS0640

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before

installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move the

seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and, therefore,

must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint or headrest to obtain the correct

child restraint fit. If the head restraint or

headrest is removed, store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the head

restraint or headrest when the child

restraint is removed. See “HEAD RE-

STRAINTS” earlier in this section or “AD-

JUSTABLE HEADRESTS” earlier in this

section for head restraint or headrest

adjustment, removal and installation informa-

tion.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest and it

is interfering with the proper child restraint

fit, try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (43,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0360B

Forward-facing — step 3

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point (rear seat installation only). See “IN-

STALLING TOP TETHER STRAP” later in

this section. Do not install child restraints

that require the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a top

tether anchor.

SSS0651

Forward-facing — step 4

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0652

Forward-facing — step 5

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

Information Provided by:

Black plate (44,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0653

Forward-facing — step 6

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

SSS0641

Forward-facing — step 8

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the child restraint

near the seat belt path. The child restraint

should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),

from side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten

the seat belt as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2

through 8.

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (45,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS1135

Forward-facing — step 10

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light should illuminate. If this

light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger

air bag and status light” in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child

restraint mode) is canceled.

SSS1136

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions

only) or the seat belt, as applicable.

1. Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor

point which is located on the back side of

the seatbacks.

2. If necessary, raise or remove the headrest to

position the top tether strap over the top of

the seatback. If the headrest is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the headrest when the child restraint is

removed.

See “ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTS” earlier in

this section for headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation information.

Position the top tether strap over the top of

the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point on the rear parcel shelf.

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint

installation procedure steps in this section

before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, consult your NISSAN

dealer for details.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a sudden stop or collision

greatly increases:

— Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

— Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

Information Provided by:

Black plate (46,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

arm.

— A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that has

a lap/shoulder belt.

LRS0455

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

.Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

.Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

LRS0453

.Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat *

1is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat *

2should be used.

.If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with

your child. Always follow all recommended

procedures.

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (47,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

LRS0464

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

when using a booster seat with the

seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats”

sections earlier in this section before installing a

child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

SSS0640

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a forward-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

Information Provided by:

Black plate (48,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 8/ 4

LRS0454

Front passenger position

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint or headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head restraint or

headrest is removed, store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the head

restraint or headrest when the booster

seat is removed. See “HEAD RE-

STRAINTS” earlier in this section or “AD-

JUSTABLE HEADRESTS” earlier in this

section for head restraint or headrest

adjustment, removal and installation informa-

tion.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest and it

is interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions for adjusting the seat belt

routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shownin“SEATBELTS”earlierinthis

section.

SSS1135

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light may or may not illuminate

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat used. See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section.

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (49,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

section contains important information concern-

ing the following systems:

.Driver and passenger supplemental front-

impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System)

.Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

.Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag

.Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head and

chest of the driver and front passenger in certain

frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can help

cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic

area of the driver and front passenger in certain

side impact collisions. The side air bag is

designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle

is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can help

cushion the impact force to the head of

occupants in front and rear outboard seating

positions in certain side impact collisions. The

curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the

side where the vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protection

provided by the driver and passenger seat belts

and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the

occupant seated a suitable distance away from

the steering wheel, instrument panel and door

finishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this

section for instructions and precautions on seat

belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

After the ignition is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

Information Provided by:

Black plate (50,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0131

SSS0132

WARNING

.The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower se-

verity frontal collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

.The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag

status light is lit or if the front

passenger seat is unoccupied. See

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” later in this section.

.The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the

seat with both feet on the floor. The

front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System, if you are

unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-

ting sideways or out of position in

any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may

also receive serious or fatal injuries

from the front air bag if you are up

against it when it inflates. Always sit

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (51,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

back against the seatback and as

far-away as practical from the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Al-

ways use the seat belts.

.The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with

sensors that detect if the seat belts

are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag

System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage then

inflates the air bags. Failure to

properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury

in an accident.

.The front passenger seat is

equipped with occupant classifica-

tion sensors (weight sensors) that

turn the front passenger air bag

OFF under some conditions. This

sensor is only used in this seat.

Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this

section.

.Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could in-

crease the risk that they are injured

if the front air bag inflates.

SSS0007

SSS0006

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

Information Provided by:

Black plate (52,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100

WARNING

.Never let children ride unrestrained

or extend their hands or face out of

the window. Do not attempt to hold

them in your lap or arms. Some

examples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the illustrations.

.Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side

air bags or curtain air bags inflate if

they are not properly restrained.

Pre-teens and children should be

properly restrained in the rear seat,

if possible.

.Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating front air bag could

seriously injure or kill your child.

See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in

this section for details.

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (53,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS0059A

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0188A

SSS0140

SSS0162

SSS0159

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bags and roof-mounted

curtain side-impact supplemental air

bags:

.The side air bags and curtain air

bags ordinarily will not inflate in the

event of a frontal impact, rear im-

pact, rollover or lower severity side

collision. Always wear your seat

belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds

of accidents.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (54,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The side air bag

and curtain air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side

air bag on the side of the seatback

of the front seat or near the side

roof rails. Do not allow anyone

sitting in the front seats or rear

outboard seats to extend their hand

out of the window or lean against

the door. Some examples of dan-

gerous riding positions are shown

in the previous illustrations.

.When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who

should always be properly re-

strained. Some examples of danger-

ous riding positions are shown in

the illustrations.

.Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

SSS1131

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air

bag modules

4. Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors)

5. Occupant classification system control unit

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental

air bags modules

7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental

air bag inflators

8. Seat belt with pretensioners

9. Satellite sensors

10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (55,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-

TEM (front seats)

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the

passenger’s advanced air bag system,

please observe the following items.

.Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

.Do not place heavy loads heavier

than 2.2 lb (4 kg) on the seatback,

head restraint or in the seatback

pocket.

.Do not store luggage behind the

seat that can press into the seat-

back.

.Confirm the operating condition

with the front passenger air bag

status light.

.If you notice that the front passen-

ger air bag status light is not

operating, please take your vehicle

to your NISSAN dealer to check the

occupant classification system.

.Until you have confirmed with your

dealer that your passenger seat

occupant classification system is

working properly, position the occu-

pants in the rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is designed

to meet certification requirements under U.S.

regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.

However, all of the information, cautions

and warnings in this manual still apply and

must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is

mounted in the instrument panel above the glove

box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher severity

frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain

frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is

not always an indication of proper front air bag

operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has

dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors

information from the Air bag Control Unit (ACU),

seat belt buckle sensors and the occupant

classification sensors (weight sensors). Inflator

operation is based on the severity of a collision

and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front

passenger, the occupant classification sensors

are also monitored. Based on information from

the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in

a crash, depending on the crash severity and

whether the front occupants are belted or

unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air

bag may be automatically turned OFF under

some conditions, depending on the information

provided by the occupant classification sensors.

If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the

passenger air bag status light will be illuminated

(if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be

illuminated, but the air bag will be off). (See

“Front passenger air bag and status light” later

in this section for further details.) One front air

bag inflating does not indicate improper perfor-

mance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If

you are considering modification of your vehicle

due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in

the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate

a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

Information Provided by:

Black plate (56,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

help to cushion the impact force on the head

and chest of the front occupants. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,

an inflating front air bag may cause facial

abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do

not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the driver

and passenger seated upright as far as practical

away from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order

to help protect the front occupants. Because of

this, the force of the front air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, the air bag module during

inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

After the ignition is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

SSS1135

Front passenger air bag status light

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protection.

Failure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats,

seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Status light:

The front passenger air bag status light is

located on the instrument panel. The light

operates as follows:

.Unoccupied passenger seat: The light

is OFF and the front passenger air bag is

OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

.Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in this

section: The light illuminates to indi-

cate that the front passenger air bag is OFF

and will not inflate in a crash.

.Occupied passenger seat and the passen-

ger meets the conditions outlined in this

section: The light is OFF to indicate

that the front passenger air bag is opera-

tional.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as described

below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate

in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags

in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (57,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

as children, by requiring the air bag to be

automatically turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensors (weight

sensors) are on the seat cushion frame under

the front passenger seat and are designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For

example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,

the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to

turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance

with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of

the type specified in the regulations is on the

seat, the occupant classification sensors can

detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as

outlined in this manual should not cause the

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat

properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by

sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise

being out of position), this could cause the

sensors to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure

to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly

for the most effective protection by the seat belt

and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate

child restraints and booster seats be properly

installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the

occupant classification sensors are designed to

operate as described above to turn the front

passenger air bag OFF for specified child

restraints. Failing to properly secure child

restrains and to use the Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode)

may allow the restraint to tip or move in an

accident or sudden stop. This can also result in

the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead

of being OFF. (See “CHILD RESTRAINTS”

earlierinthissectionforproperuseand

installation.)

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a

crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object being detected by the occupant

classification sensors. Other conditions could

also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle

occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can

monitor when the front passenger air bag is

automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-

pied. The light will not illuminate when the front

passenger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

passenger air bag status light is illuminated

(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be

that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting

on the seat properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the passenger air bag status light may or may

not be illuminated, depending on the size of the

child and the type of child restraint being used. If

the air bag status light is not illuminated

(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a

crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure that

the child restraint is installed properly, the seat

belt is used properly and the occupant is

positioned properly. If the air bag status light is

not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child

restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the

system is OFF by using a special tool. However,

until you have confirmed with your dealer that

your air bag is working properly, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag status

light will take a few seconds to register a change

in the passenger seat status. However, if the

seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status

light will remain off.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

Information Provided by:

Black plate (58,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area,

will blink. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag

precautions

WARNING

.Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the instru-

ment panel. Also, do not place any

objects between any occupant and

the steering wheel or instrument

panel. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bags inflate.

.Do not place objects with sharp

edges on the seat. Also, do not

place heavy objects on the seat that

will leave permanent impressions in

the seat. Such objects can damage

the seat or occupant classification

sensors (weight sensors). This can

affect the operation of the air bag

system and result in serious perso-

nal injury.

.Do not use water or acidic cleaners

(hot steam cleaners) on the seat.

This can damage the seat or occu-

pant classification sensors. This can

also affect the operation of the air

bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

.Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you

may severely burn yourself.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the supplemental air bag system.

This is to prevent accidental infla-

tion of the supplemental air bag or

damage to the supplemental air bag

system.

.Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end

structure. This could affect proper

operation of the front air bag sys-

tem.

.Tampering with the front air bag

system may result in serious perso-

nal injury. Tampering includes

changes to the steering wheel and

the instrument panel assembly by

placing material over the steering

wheel pad and above the instrument

panel or by installing additional trim

material around the air bag system.

.Modifying or tampering with the

front passenger seat may result in

serious personal injury. For exam-

ple, do not change the front seats by

placing material on the seat cushion

or by installing additional trim ma-

terial, such as seat covers, on the

seat that is not specifically designed

to assure proper air bag operation.

Additionally, do not stow any ob-

jects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback.

Such objects may interfere with the

proper operation of the occupant

classification sensors.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the seat belt system. This may

affect the front air bag system.

Tampering with the seat belt system

may result in serious personal in-

jury.

.Work on and around the front air

bag system should be done by a

NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (59,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

trical equipment should also be

done by a NISSAN dealer. The

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not

be modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the air bag system.

.A cracked windshield should be

replaced immediately by a qualified

repair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

SSS0978

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM-

PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND

ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM-

PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYS-

TEMS

The side air bags are located in the outside of

the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air

bags are located in the side roof rails. These

systems are designed to meet voluntary guide-

lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-

position occupants. However, all of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed.

The side air bags and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate in higher severity side

collisions, although they may inflate if the forces

in another type of collision are similar to those of

a higher severity side impact. They are designed

to inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted. They may not inflate in certain side

collisions on the side where the vehicle is

impacted.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain air

bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed

by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation

and choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest

and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain

air bags help to cushion the impact force to the

head of occupants in the front and rear outboard

seating positions. They can help save lives and

reduce serious injuries. However, side air bags

and curtain air bags may cause abrasions or

other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags

do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the side air bags. Rear seat

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

Information Provided by:

Black plate (60,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate quickly in order to help protect the

occupants in the outboard seating positions.

Because of this, the force of the side air bags

and curtain air bags inflating can increase the

risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is

against, these air bag modules during inflation.

The side air bags and curtain air bags will deflate

quickly after the collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

After turning the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

WARNING

.Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door

finisher and the front seat. Such

objects may become dangerous

projectiles and cause injury if a side

air bag inflates.

.Right after inflation, several side air

bagandcurtainairbagsystem

components will be hot. Do not

touch them; you may severely burn

yourself.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the side air bag and curtain air

bag systems. This is to prevent

damage to or accidental inflation

of the side air bag and curtain air

bag systems.

.Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel.

This could affect proper operation

of the side air bag and curtain air

bag systems.

.Tampering with the side air bag

system may result in serious perso-

nal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing

material near the seatbacks or by

installing additional trim material,

such as seat covers, around the side

air bag.

.Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems should

be done by a NISSAN dealer. In-

stallation of electrical equipment

should also be done by a NISSAN

dealer. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the side air

bag and curtain supplemental air

bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to

the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (61,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 2/ 21

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS

(front seats)

WARNING

.The pretensioners cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

.If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but a pretensioner is not

activated, be sure to have the pre-

tensioner system checked and, if

necessary, replaced by a NISSAN

dealer.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the pretensioner system. This is

to prevent damage to or accidental

activation of the pretensioners.

Tampering with the pretensioner

system may result in serious perso-

nal injury.

.Work around and on the preten-

sioner system should be done by a

NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-

trical equipment should also be

done by a NISSAN dealer. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the pretensioner system.

.If you need to dispose of a preten-

sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a

NISSAN dealer. Correct preten-

sioner disposal procedures are set

forthintheappropriateNISSAN

Service Manual. Incorrect disposal

procedures could cause personal

injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the

supplemental air bag system in certain types of

collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, it

helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle

becomes involved in certain types of collisions,

helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt

retractor. These seat belts are used the same

way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. The

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow

the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to

reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental airbag warning light is

used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner

system. See “SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT” later in this section. If the

supplemental airbag warning light illuminates,

have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

Information Provided by:

Black plate (62,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSS1020

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle

as shown in the illustration.

1SRS air bag

The warning labels are located on the surface of

the sun visors.

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, display-

ing in the instrument panel, monitors the

circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag,

front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact sup-

plemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner

systems. The monitored circuits include Air bag

Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, satellite

sensors, occupant classification system, front air

bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain air

bag modules, pretensioners and all related

wiring.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.

This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and

pretensioner systems need servicing:

.The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

.The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems

may not operate properly. They must be checked

and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest

NISSAN dealer.

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (63,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-

CEDURE

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags

and pretensioners are designed to activate on a

one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is

damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light

will remain illuminated after inflation has oc-

curred. Repair and replacement of these sys-

tems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain

air bags and pretensioners and related parts

should be pointed out to the person performing

the maintenance. The ignition switch should

always be in the LOCK position when working

under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

.Once a front air bag, side air bag or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioners must

also be replaced. The air bag mod-

ule and pretensioner should be

replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The

air bag modules and pretensioner

system cannot be repaired.

.The front air bag, side air bag and

curtain air bag systems, and preten-

sioner system should be inspected

by a NISSAN dealer if there is any

damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle.

.If you need to dispose of a supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner or

scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN

dealer. Correct supplemental air

bag and pretensioner system dis-

posal procedures are set forth in the

appropriate NISSAN Service Man-

ual. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

Information Provided by:

Black plate (7,1)

2 Instruments and controls

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Cockpit............................................................ 2-2

Instrument panel ................................................ 2-3

Meters and gauges............................................. 2-4

Speedometer and odometer ............................. 2-5

Tachometer................................................... 2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge ..................... 2-6

Fuel gauge ................................................... 2-7

Vehicle information display................................ 2-8

Outside air temperature ................................... 2-8

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator (if so equipped) ...................... 2-8

Trip computer................................................ 2-8

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ....... 2-11

Checking bulbs ........................................... 2-11

Warning lights ............................................. 2-12

Indicator lights............................................. 2-16

Audible reminders ........................................ 2-18

Integrated control system (if so equipped).............. 2-19

Drive mode................................................. 2-19

Setup function............................................. 2-20

Drive information .......................................... 2-25

Eco information............................................ 2-26

Security systems.............................................. 2-28

Vehicle Security System................................. 2-28

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ................. 2-29

Windshield wiper and washer switch .................... 2-31

Rear window wiper and washer switch.................. 2-32

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch..... 2-33

Headlight and turn signal switch .......................... 2-34

Headlight switch .......................................... 2-34

Turn signal switch ........................................ 2-37

Fog light switch (if so equipped)...................... 2-37

Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-37

Horn ............................................................. 2-38

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ........... 2-38

Heated seats (if so equipped) ............................. 2-39

Clock (if so equipped)....................................... 2-40

Adjusting the time ........................................ 2-40

Power outlet ................................................... 2-41

Storage ......................................................... 2-41

Cup holders................................................ 2-41

Cargo floor box ........................................... 2-42

Glove box .................................................. 2-43

Coat hook .................................................. 2-43

Cargo cover (if so equipped) .......................... 2-43

Windows ....................................................... 2-44

Power windows ........................................... 2-44

Moonroof (if so equipped) .................................. 2-47

Automatic moonroof...................................... 2-47

Information Provided by:

Black plate (8,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Interior lights ................................................... 2-48

Map lights (if so equipped)............................. 2-49

Map light control switch (if so equipped) ........... 2-49

Cargo room lights ........................................ 2-50

Information Provided by:

Black plate (66,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSI0769

1. Outside mirror remote control switch

2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight

— Turn signal light

— Fog light*

3. Steering wheel

— Electric power steering system

— Horn

— Driver’s supplemental air bag

4. Wiper and washer switch

5. Selector lever or shift lever

— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

— Manual Transmission (MT)

6. Fuse box cover

7. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

8. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) switch*

9. Tilting steering wheel lever

10. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

— Audio control

— Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System control

11. Ignition switch (models without Intelligent Key

system)

12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)

— Cruise control switches

13. Heated seat switch*

*: if so equipped

COCKPIT

2-2 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (67,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSI0770

1. Meters and gauges

2. Center ventilator

3. Audio system* or Navigation system**

— Clock*

4. Hazard warning flasher switch

5. Integrated Control System*

— Clock

— Drive mode

— Heater and air conditioner control

— Defroster switch

5. Heater and air conditioner control (models without

Integrated Control System)

— Defroster switch

6. Front passenger supplemental air bag

7. Side ventilator

8. Fuel-filler door release handle

9. Hood release handle

10. Push-button ignition switch (models with Intelli-

gent Key system)

11. AUX/USB connector*

12. Parking brake

13. Cup holder

14. Power outlet

15. Glove box

*: if so equipped

**: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instruments and controls 2-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (68,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4601

1. Tachometer

2. Engine coolant temperature gauge

3. Vehicle information display

— Odometer/twin trip odometer

— Trip computer

— Outside air temperature

4. Fuel gauge

5. Speedometer

6. Warning/indicator lights

7. Instrument brightness control knob

8. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-

tion indicator*

9. RESET switch for trip odometer/Trip computer

mode switch

*: if so equipped

The needle indicators may move slightly

after the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF or LOCK position. This is not a

malfunction.

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (69,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4504

Speedometer

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in

miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour

(km/h).

SIC4571

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer *

1/twin trip odometer *

2are

displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

The odometer records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the reset switch *

3located on the

meter panel changes the display as follows:

TRIP A ?TRIP B ?Trip computer mode ?

TRIP A

For trip computer information, see “TRIP COM-

PUTER” later in this section.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the reset switch *

3for approximately 1

second resets the trip odometer to zero.

Instruments and controls 2-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (70,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SPA2809

Loose fuel cap warning message

Push the reset button *

Afor more than 1

second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

message after the fuel cap has been tightened.

For additional information see “FUEL-FILLER

CAP” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

SIC4506

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the

engine into the red zone *

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce

engine speed. Operating the engine in

the red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

SIC4123

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge *

1indicates the engine coolant

temperature.

The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range when the gauge is within the zone

2shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

2-6 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (71,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant

temperature near the hot (H) end of the

normal range, reduce vehicle speed to

decrease temperature. If gauge is over

the normal range, stop the vehicle as

soon as safely possible. If the engine is

overheated, continued operation of the

vehicle may seriously damage the en-

gine. See “IF YOUR VEHICLE OVER-

HEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section for immediate action required. SIC4124

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge *

1indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge

registers 0 (empty).

The low fuel warning light illuminates when

the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably

before the gauge reaches 0. There will be a

small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel

gauge reaches 0.

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the front passenger’s side of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

.If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon

as possible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by

a NISSAN dealer.

.For additional information, see

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”

later in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (72,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4531

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the vehicle information display shows

the following information:

1. Outside air temperature

2. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-

tion indicator (if so equipped)

3. Odometer/Instrument brightness control display

4. Twin trip odometer/Trip computer

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

The outside air temperature is displayed in 8For

8C.

When the outside air temperature becomes

378F(38C) or lower, the outside air temperature

display blinks to give a warning. The display will

stop blinking after 1 minute or when the outside

air temperature becomes 398F(48C) or above.

The display may differ from the actual outside

temperature displayed on various signs or bill-

boards.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-

MISSION (CVT) POSITION INDICATOR

(if so equipped)

The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator indicates the selector lever

position when the ignition switch is in the ON

position. SIC4532

TRIP COMPUTER

The switch for the trip computer is located on

the meter panel.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pushing the trip computer mode

switch *

Each time the trip computer mode switch *

Ais

pushed, the display will change as follows:

(TRIP A ?TRIP B) ?Current fuel consumption

?Distance to empty (dte) ?Average fuel

consumption ?Elapsed time ?Torque vector-

ing AWD (AWD model) (?TRIP A)

2-8 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (73,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Current fuel consumption

The current fuel consumption mode shows the

current fuel consumption.

Distance to empty (dte — mls or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The dte is constantly

being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in

the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning

feature. When the fuel level is low, the dte mode

is automatically selected and the dte display will

blink. Push the trip computer mode switch *

to return to the mode that was selected before

the warning occurred.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte

display will change to “----”.

.If the amount of fuel added is small, the

display just before the ignition switch is

turned off may continue to be displayed.

.When driving uphill or rounding curves, the

fuel in the tank shifts, which may momenta-

rily change the display.

Average fuel consumption (mpg or l

(liter)/100 km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the trip computer

mode switch *

Afor approximately 1 second.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the

display shows “---”.

Elapsed time

The elapsed time mode shows the time since

the last reset. The displayed time can be reset

by pushing the trip computer mode switch *

for approximately 1 second.

SIC4600

Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model)

The Torque vectoring mode shows the current

amount of torque distributed to each wheel.

Each torque indicator is displayed as a bar

graph *

1divided into 3 segments. The upper

indicator displays the current amount of torque

distribution (left and right) for the front wheels.

The lower indicator displays the current amount

of torque distribution (left and right) for the rear

wheels. The number of segments shows the

amount of torque currently distributed to each

wheel.

Resetting displays

When the average fuel consumption, elapsed

time or TRIP B is displayed, push the trip

Instruments and controls 2-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (74,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

computer mode switch *

Afor longer than 3

seconds. The average fuel consumption,

elapsed time and trip odometer (TRIP B only)

displays will be reset at the same time.

2-10 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (75,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWD

model)* Low fuel warning light Cruise indicator light*

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light

Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Low washer fluid warning light* Engine start operation indicator light*

Brake warning light

P position selecting warning light* High beam indicator light

Seat belt warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Door open warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light Low beam indicator light

Electric power steering warning light All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indicator light (AWD

model)* Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light All-Wheel Drive (AWD)-V indicator light

(AWD model)*

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator

light

Intelligent Key system warning light* Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

indicator light* *: if so equipped

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake

and place the ignition switch in the ON position

without starting the engine. The following lights

will come on:

, or , , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go

off (if so equipped):

, or , , , , ,

, , , ,

If any light does not come on, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the

electrical system. Have the system checked by

a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (76,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING LIGHTS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning

light (AWD model)

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light will

illuminate. It will turn off soon after the engine is

started.

If the AWD system malfunctions or the revolu-

tion or radius of the front and the rear wheel

differs, the AWD warning light will either remain

illuminated or blink. (See “ALL-WHEEL DRIVE

(AWD)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

or Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates

the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may

indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-

tance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake

and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light illuminates when the parking brake is

applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the

light illuminates while the engine is running with

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle

and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid is

necessary, add fluid and have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See “BRAKE

AND CLUTCH FLUID” in the “8. Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section.)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warningsystemcheckedbyaNISSAN

dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator:

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

brake system checked, and if necessary re-

paired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See

“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”

earlier in this section.)

WARNING

.Your brake system may not be

working properly if the warning light

is on. Driving could be dangerous. If

you judge it to be safe, drive care-

fully to the nearest service station

for repairs. Otherwise, have your

vehicle towed because driving it

could be dangerous.

.Pressing the brake pedal with the

engine stopped and/or low brake

fluid level may increase your stop-

ping distance and braking will re-

quire greater pedal effort as well as

pedal travel.

.If the brake fluid level is below the

2-12 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (77,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

minimum or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If the light illuminates while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not

functioning properly. Turn the engine off and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,

broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a

NISSAN dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alternator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light illuminates when any of the doors and/

or lift gate are not closed securely while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

Electric power steering warning

light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the electric power steering warning light illumi-

nates. After starting the engine, the electric

power steering warning light turns off. This

indicates the electric power steering system is

operational.

If the electric power steering warning light

illuminates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the electric power steering system is

not functioning properly and may need servicing.

Have the electric power steering system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When the electric power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, the power

assist to the steering will cease operation but

you will still have control of the vehicle. At this

time, greater steering efforts are required to

operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp

turns and at low speeds.

See “ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYS-

TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or illuminates during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is

not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See

“ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.)

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Such damage is not cov-

ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as

soon as it is safe to do so.

Intelligent Key system warning light

(if so equipped)

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds

and then turns off.

This light illuminates or blinks as follows:

.The light blinks in yellow when the door is

closed with the Intelligent Key left outside

the vehicle and the ignition switch in the

ACC or ON position. Make sure that the

Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

.The light blinks in green when the Intelligent

Key battery is running out of power. Replace

the battery with a new one. (See “KEY

BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

Instruments and controls 2-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (78,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.The light illuminates in yellow when it warns

of a malfunction with Intelligent Key system.

If the warning light illuminates in yellow while the

engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start

the engine. If the light comes on while the engine

is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in

these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair

as soon as possible.

Low fuel warning light

This light illuminates when the fuel in the tank is

getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,

preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the 0

(empty) position.

There will be a small reserve of fuel

remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge

reaches the 0 position.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about 1 second

and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label. The low tire pressure warning

light does not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to

the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-

SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section and “TIRE

PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”

in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-

SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

.If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, have the vehicle checked

by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

.If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle

speed, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop the vehicle as

soon as possible. Driving with un-

der-inflated tires may permanently

damage the tires and increase the

likelihood of tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shownontheTireandLoading

Information label to turn the low

tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still illuminates while driv-

ing after adjusting the tire pressure,

2-14 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (79,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

a tire may be flat. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible.

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will

remain on after 1 minute. Contact

your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/

or system resetting.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

CAUTION

.The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure

to check the tire pressure regularly.

.If the vehicle is being driven at

speeds of less than 16 MPH (25

km/h), the TPMS may not operate

correctly.

.Be sure to install the specified size

of tires to the four wheels correctly.

Low washer fluid warning light

(Canada only)

This light illuminates when the washer fluid is at

a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See

“WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

P position selecting warning light

(if so equipped)

The warning light blinks in red when the ignition

switch is pushed to stop the engine with the

selector lever in any position except the P (Park)

position.

If this warning appears, move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position or push the ignition

switch to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound.

See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

Seat belt warning light

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat

belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, and will

remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is

fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound

for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt

is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front

passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not

fastened when the front passenger’s seat is

occupied. For about 5 seconds after the ignition

switch is in the ON position, the system does

not activate the warning light for the front

passenger.

See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning light

After turning the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning

light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the

supplemental front air bag and supplemental

side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems

and/or pretensioner seat belt are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

Instruments and controls 2-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (80,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and

pretensioner systems need servicing and your

vehicle must be taken to your nearest NISSAN

dealer.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

.The supplemental air bag warning light does

not illuminate at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental

Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioners may

not function properly.

For additional information, see “SUPPLEMEN-

TAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light

The light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting

the driver that the vehicle is nearing its traction

limits. The road surface may be slippery.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indicator

light (AWD model)

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indicator light

illuminates and then turns off.

When selecting AWD mode while the engine is

running, the AWD indicator light illuminates.

(See “ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD-V) indica-

tor light (AWD model)

When selecting AWD-V mode while the engine

is running, the AWD-V indicator light illuminates.

(See “ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion (CVT) indicator light (if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

indicator light illuminates and then turns off.

Cruise indicator light (if so

equipped)

Cruise main switch indicator:

This light illuminates when the cruise control

main switch is pushed. The light turns off when

the main switch is pushed again. When the

cruise indicator light illuminates, the cruise

control system is operational.

Cruise malfunction:

If the cruise indicator light blinks while the

engine is running, it may indicate the cruise

control system is not functioning properly. Have

the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

See “CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (81,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 10/ 25

Front passenger air bag status

light

The front passenger air bag status light (located

on the center of the instrument panel) will be lit

and the passenger front air bag will be OFF

depending on how the front passenger seat is

being used.

For front passenger air bag status light opera-

tion,see“NISSANADVANCEDAIRBAG

SYSTEM (front seats)” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section of this manual.

Engine start operation indicator

light (if so equipped)

This light appears when the selector lever is in

the P (Park) position (Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) models) or N (Neutral)

position (Manual Transmission (MT) models).

This light means that the engine will start by

pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal

depressed. You can start the engine directly in

any position.

High beam indicator light

This light illuminates when the headlight high

beam is on and goes out when the low beam is

selected.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light illuminates

steady or blinks while the engine is running, it

may indicate a potential emission control and/or

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) mal-

function.

The malfunction indicator light may also illumi-

nate steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check

to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and

closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3

US gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine

is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not

ready for an emission control system inspection/

maintenance test. (See “READINESS FOR

INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST” in

the “9. Technical and consumer information”

section.)

Operation:

The malfunction indicator light will illuminate in

one of two ways:

.Malfunction indicator light illuminated steady

— An emission control system and/or CVT

malfunction has been detected. Check the

fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning message is displayed on the twin

trip odometer. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving trips. If the

light does not turn off after a few

driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

.Malfunction indicator light blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system.

To reduce or avoid emission control system

damage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop

blinking and remain illuminated.

Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN

Instruments and controls 2-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (82,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

and/or CVT system checked and re-

paired as necessary could lead to poor

driveability, reduced fuel economy, and

possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Security indicator light

The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the

ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This function

indicates the security system equipped on the

vehicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning, this light

will remain on while the ignition switch is in the

ON position. For additional information, see

“SECURITY SYSTEMS” later in this section.

Low beam indicator light

The light illuminates when the headlight switch is

turned to the position.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch

lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

indicator light

The light illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates that the VDC system is not operating.

When the VDC off indicator light and slip

indicator light illuminate with the VDC system

turned on, this light alerts the driver to the fact

that the VDC system’s fail-safe mode is operat-

ing, for example the VDC system may not be

functioning properly. Have the system checked

by a NISSAN dealer. If a malfunction occurs in

the system, the VDC system function will be

canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For

additional information, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC

CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

Models with Intelligent Key system:

A chime will sound if the driver side door is

opened while the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC position.

Make sure the ignition switch is pushed to the

OFF position, and take the Intelligent Key with

you when leaving the vehicle.

Models without Intelligent Key system:

The key reminder chime sounds if the driver’s

side door is opened while the key is left in the

ignition switch and the ignition switch is in the

ACC, OFF or LOCK position. Remove the key

and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

The light reminder chime will sound when the

driver side door is opened with the light switch

in the AUTO, or position, and the

ignition switch is in the ACC, OFF or LOCK

position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave the

vehicle.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will

first occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,

the sound will always be heard even if the brake

pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the warning

sound is heard.

2-18 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (83,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Parking brake reminder chime

The parking brake reminder chime will sound if

the vehicle is driven at more than 4 MPH (7

km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop the

vehicle and release the parking brake.

Seat belt warning chime

The seat belt warning chime will sound for about

6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

The Integrated Control System is located below

the audio system or navigation system (if so

equipped). Two Integrated Control System

modes can be selected: Drive mode and

Climate Control mode.

Depending on which Integrated Control System

mode selected (Drive mode or Climate Control

mode), the screen display and some button

functions will change.

.Drive mode

In the Drive mode, three types of driving

modes can be selected: NORMAL, SPORT

and ECO. See “DRIVE MODE” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section. In addition,

while in the Drive mode, SETUP, Drive

information and ECO information can be

displayed and adjusted. See “DRIVE

MODE” later in this section.

.Climate Control mode

In the Climate Control mode, the climate

control can be set and adjusted. See

“AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER (with

Integrated Control System)” in the “4.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone

systems” section.

DRIVE MODE

When the Drive mode select button is pressed,

the display and buttons appear as shown.

INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (84,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4623

1. Drive mode select button

2. SETUP button

3. Drive mode NORMAL button

4. Drive mode SPORT button

5. Drive mode ECO button

6. Display screen

7. Drive information button

8. ECO information button

9. ENTER button/Selection dial

SETUP FUNCTION

While in the Drive mode, the following items can

be set up by pressing the SETUP button.

.Display Brightness

.Button Brightness

.Clock Time Setting

.Select Language

.Select Units

.Auto Interior Illumination

.Selective Door unlock

.Auto Headlight Sensitivity (if so equipped)

.CLIMATE ECO

NOTE:

.The SETUP function cannot be ad-

justed while driving.

.When the battery is disconnected, the

SETUP memory is erased and reverts to

the default settings. If necessary, reset

the SETUP memory after reconnecting

the battery.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (85,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4617

Setting Display Brightness and Button

Brightness

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Display Bright-

ness” or “Button Brightness” then press the

ENTER button.

SIC4557

4. Turn the Selection dial to + to increase

brightness or to −to decrease brightness,

then press the ENTER button to apply the

selection.

Display Brightness and Button Brightness can

be manually adjusted during the day (when the

headlight switch is off) or at night (when the

headlight switch is on).

When the bar is at the minimum or maximum

brightness level, the brightness level is the same

as the daytime level (headlight switch is on) or

nighttime level (headlight switch off).

SIC4558

Clock Time Setting

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Clock Time

Setting”, then press the ENTER button.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (86,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4559

4. Turn the Selection dial to select the day of

the week, then press the ENTER button to

apply the selection.

5. Turn the Selection dial to select the hour and

AM or PM, then press the ENTER button to

apply the selection.

6. Turn the Selection dial to select the minutes,

then press the ENTER button to apply the

selection.

SIC4560

Select Language

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Select Lan-

guage”, then press the ENTER button.

SIC4561

4. Turn the Selection dial to select the pre-

ferred language, then press the ENTER

button to apply the selection.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (87,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4580

Select Units

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Select Units” then

press the ENTER button.

SIC4581

4. Turn the Selection dial to select “US” or

“METRIC”, then press the ENTER button to

apply the selection.

SIC4605

Auto Interior Illumination

Select to turn the illumination of the interior

lights on or off when any door is unlocked.

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Auto Interior

Illumination” then press the ENTER button.

4. Turn the Selection dial to select “ON” or

“OFF”, then press the ENTER button to

apply the selection.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (88,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4606

Selective Door Unlock

When this item is turned on, only the driver’s

door is unlocked after the door unlock operation

is performed once. All of the doors can be

unlocked if the door unlock operation is per-

formed again within 1 minute.

When this item is turned off, all the doors will be

unlocked after the door unlock operation is

performed once.

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Selective Door

Unlock” then press the ENTER button.

4. Turn the Selection dial to select “ON” or

“OFF”, then press the ENTER button to

apply the selection. The indicator will turn

red when selective door unlock is on.

SIC4607

Auto Headlight Sensitivity (if so

equipped)

Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic

headlight.

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Auto Headlight

Sensitivity” then press the ENTER button.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (89,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4583

4. Turn the Selection dial to + to increase

sensitivity or to −to decrease sensitivity,

then press the ENTER button to apply the

selection.

SIC4562

DRIVE INFORMATION

While in the Drive mode, push the Drive

information button to display elapsed time,

average speed and trip distance. Pressing the

Drive information button a second time will

display the G (gravity)-Force screen.

Elapsed time

The elapsed time shows the time since the last

reset.

Average speed (km/h or MPH)

The average speed shows the average vehicle

speed since the last reset.

Trip distance (km or MILES)

The trip distance shows the distance driven

since the last reset.

To reset the elapsed time, average speed and

trip distance, push the ENTER button for more

than one second. All three drive information

displays will reset at the same time.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (90,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4618

G-Force screen

The G (gravity)-Force screen displays the

current acceleration and deceleration (front-to-

rear) and cornering (side-to-side) G-Force on

the vehicle.

ECO INFORMATION

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display controls while

driving so that full attention may given

to vehicle operation.

The following ECO INFO mode will appear on

the display by pushing the ECO information

button, then turning the selection dial to scroll

through the different screens.

While driving, only one ECO information screen

is displayed. The vehicle must be stopped to

scroll through the different screens.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (91,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4563

Daily Reset

Records of up to the past 4 days of fuel

consumption can be shown on the display.

Weekly Reset

Records of up to the past 4 weeks of each

week’s fuel consumption can be shown on the

display.

NOTE:

When the clock is not set, the ECO

information (daily and weekly) cannot be

used.

Reset at Start

Records of up to the past 4 times of each time of

ignition switch ON fuel consumption can be

shown on the display.

Manual Reset

Records of up to the past 4 times of resetting

fuel consumption can be shown on the display.

The displayed ECO INFO can be reset by

pushing the ENTER button for longer than 1

second.

Instruments and controls 2-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (92,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4543

Your vehicle has two types of security systems,

as follows:

.Vehicle security system

.NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by the

security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors,

or lift gate when the system is armed. It is not,

however, a motion detection type system that

activates when a vehicle is moved or when a

vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior

or exterior vehicle components in all situations.

Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,

and always lock it when unattended. Be aware

of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit

areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection,

such as component locks, identification markers,

and tracking systems, are available at auto

supply stores and specialty shops. Your

NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment.

Check with your insurance company to see if

you may be eligible for discounts for various

theft protection features.

SIC2045

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the

windows are open.

2. Models with Intelligent Key system:

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position

and remove the Intelligent Key from the

vehicle.

Models without Intelligent Key system:

Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position and remove the key.

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-28 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (93,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors

can be locked with:

.the LOCK button on the keyfob or

Intelligent Key (if so equipped)

.any request switch (Intelligent Key

equipped model)

.the power door lock switch

.the key — master or mechanical (In-

telligent Key equipped model)

4. Confirm that the security indicator light

illuminates. The security indicator light stays

on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle

security system is now pre-armed. After

about 30 seconds the vehicle security

system automatically shifts into the armed

phase. The security light begins to flash

once every approximately 3 seconds. If,

during this 30-second pre-arm time period,

the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position, the

system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passengers

are in the vehicle, the system will activate

with all doors locked with the ignition

switch in the LOCK position. When turning

the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the follow-

ing alarm:

.The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

.The alarm automatically turns off after

approximately 50 seconds. However, the

alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered

with again.

The alarm is activated by:

.Unlocking the door without using the keyfob,

the Intelligent Key (if so equipped) the

request switch (if so equipped) or the key.

(Even if the door is opened by releasing the

door inside lock knob, the alarm will

activate.)

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by

pushing the UNLOCK button on the keyfob

or Intelligent Key, pushing the request switch or

using the key. The alarm will not stop if the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON

position.

If the system does not operate as de-

scribed above, have it checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-

TEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using the registered

key, it may be due to interference caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automated payment device on the key

ring. Restart the engine using the following

procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately 10

seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,

NISSAN recommends placing the regis-

tered key on a separate key ring to avoid

interference from other devices.

Statement related to section 15 of FCC

rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System (CONT ASSY-BCM. ANT ASSY-

IMMOBILISER)

Instruments and controls 2-29

Information Provided by:

Black plate (94,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-

da. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY

RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD

VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-

ATE THE EQUIPMENT. SIC2045

Security indicator light

The security indicator light is located on the

meter panel. It indicates the status of the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks after the ignition switch was in

the LOCK position. This function indicates the

security systems equipped on the vehicle are

operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer

for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

service as soon as possible. Please bring

all registered keys that you have when

visiting a NISSAN dealer for service.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (95,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm windshield with

the defroster before you wash the

windshield.

CAUTION

.Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

.Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

.Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based washer fluid

concentrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

window washer reservoir tank.

.Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s

recommended levels before pouring

the fluid into the window washer

reservoir tank. Do not use the

window washer reservoir tank to

mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

If the windshield wiper operation is inter-

rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop

moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,

turn the wiper switch to the OFF position

and remove the snow or ice that is on and

around the wiper arms. In approximately 1

minute, turn the switch on again to operate

the wiper.

SIC3664

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

1Intermittent — intermittent operation can be

adjusted by turning the knob toward *

(Slower) or *

B(Faster).

2Low — continuous low speed operation

3High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up *

4to have one sweep

operation of the wiper.

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-31

Information Provided by:

Black plate (96,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Pull the lever toward you *

5to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

Pulling up the wiper arm:

The wiper arm should be in the up position when

replacing the wiper.

To pull up the wiper arm, pull the lever *

5when

the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position within

1 minute. The wiper operation stops in mid-

operation. The wiper arm can be pulled up.

To replace the wiper arm, place the wiper arm in

the down position and then push the lever *

up once.

CAUTION

Do not operate the windshield wiper

while the wiper arm is pulled up. The

wiper arm may be damaged.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the rear window

glass and obscure your vision. Warm

the rear window with the defroster

before you wash the rear window.

CAUTION

.Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

.Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

.Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based washer fluid

concentrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

window washer reservoir tank.

.Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s

recommended levels before pouring

the fluid into the window washer

reservoir tank. Do not use the

window washer reservoir tank to

mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

If the rear window wiper operation is

interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may

stop moving to protect its motor. If this

occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF

position and remove the snow or ice that is

on and around the wiper arms. In approxi-

mately 1 minute, turn the switch on again

to operate the wiper.

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH

2-32 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (97,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC3666

The rear window wiper and washer operate

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position

to operate the wiper.

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

(not adjustable)

2Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-

tion

Push the switch forward *

3to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

SIC4520

Type A

SIC4519

Type B

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and

outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine

and push the switch *

1on. The indicator light

2will illuminate. Push the switch again to turn

the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approximately 15

minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-33

Information Provided by:

Black plate (98,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC3668

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

1Turn the switch to the position:

The front park, side marker, tail, license

plate and instrument lights will come on.

2Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the other

lights remain on.

SIC3669

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to be

set so they turn on and off automatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position *

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch

to the OFF, or position.

The autolight system can turn on the headlights

automatically when it is dark and turn off the

headlights when it is light.

For US models (if so equipped): The headlights

will also be turned on automatically at twilight or

in rainy weather (when the windshield wiper is

operated continuously).

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position and one of the doors is opened and this

condition is continued, the headlights remain on

for 5 minutes.

Automatic headlights off delay

You can keep the headlights on for up to 45

seconds after you place the ignition switch in

OFF and open any door then close all the doors.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

2-34 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (99,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA1232

Be sure not to put anything on top of the

photo sensor *

1located on the top of the

instrument panel. The photo sensor con-

trols the autolight; if it is covered, the

photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the

headlights will illuminate.

SIC3670

Headlight beam select

1To select the low beam, put the lever in the

neutral position as shown.

2To select the high beam, push the lever

forward while the switch is in the

position. Pull it back to select the low beam.

3Pulling the lever toward you will flash the

headlight high beam even when the head-

light switch is in the OFF position.

Battery saver system

.When the headlight switch is in the or

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the lights will automatically

turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch

has been placed in the OFF position.

.When the headlight switch remains in the

or position after the lights

automatically turn off, the lights will turn on

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

CAUTION

.When you turn on the headlight

switch again after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will not

turn off automatically. Be sure to

turn the light switch to the OFF

position when you leave the vehicle

for extended periods of time, other-

wise the battery will be discharged.

.Never leave the light switch on

when the engine is not running for

extended periods of time even if the

headlights turn off automatically.

Daytime running light system (Canada

only)

The daytime running lights automatically illumi-

nate when the engine is started with the parking

brake released. The daytime running lights

operate with the headlight switch in the OFF

position or in the position. Turn the

headlight switch to the position for full

Instruments and controls 2-35

Information Provided by:

Black plate (100,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine

is started, the daytime running lights do not

illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate

once the parking brake is released. The daytime

running lights will remain on until the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system

is active, tail lights on your vehicle are

not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on

your headlights. Failure to do so could

cause an accident injuring yourself and

others.

SIC4517

SIC4129

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the control knob *

Ato adjust the bright-

ness of the instrument panel lights. The bright-

ness indicator *

Bwill be shown briefly in the

vehicle information display when the control is

turned.

When the brightness level reaches the maximum

or minimum, a beep will sound.

2-36 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (101,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 2/ 21

SIC3671

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

1Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning

direction. When the turn is completed, the turn

signals cancel automatically.

2Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or

down to the point where lights begin flashing.

SIC3672

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the position, then turn the switch

to the position. To turn them off, turn the

switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on for the fog lights to

operate.

When the headlight switch is in the AUTO

position, turning the fog light switch to the

position will turn on the headlights, fog lights

and the other lights while the ignition switch is in

the ON position or the engine is running.

SIC2574

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights will flash.

WARNING

.If stopping for an emergency, be

sure to move the vehicle well off the

road.

.Do not use the hazard warning

flashers while moving on the high-

way unless unusual circumstances

force you to drive so slowly that

your vehicle might become a hazard

to other traffic.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-37

Information Provided by:

Black plate (102,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are

on.

The flasher can be actuated with the ignition

switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

SIC4521

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of

the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury.

SIC4544

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most

driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.

If maximum engine power is needed to free a

stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will illuminate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. (See “VEHICLE

DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.)

HORN VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

2-38 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (103,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

body parts that contact the seat. Use of

the seat heater by such people could

result in serious injury.

CAUTION

.The battery could run down if the

seat heater is operated while the

engine is not running.

.Do not use the seat heater for

extended periods or when no one

is using the seat.

.Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a

blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.

Otherwise, the seat may become

overheated.

.Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in

damage to the heater.

.Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately

with a dry cloth.

.When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar

materials.

.If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SIC2770

The seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The

switches located on the center console can be

operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

1For high heat, push the HI (High) side of

the switch.

2For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of

the switch.

The indicator light in the switch *

3will

illuminate when the heater is on.

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (104,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to

the level position. Make sure the indicator

light goes off.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or

before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn

off the switch.

The digital clock (in the audio unit) displays time

when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position. The clock ON or OFF mode can be

selected. For details of the digital clock in the

INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM, refer to

“Clock Time Setting” earlier in this section. For

details of the digital clock in the NAVIGATION

SYSTEM, refer to “Clock” in the “4. Heater, air

conditioner, audio and phone systems” section.

If the power supply is disconnected, the

clock will not indicate the correct time.

Readjust the time.

SIC4131

ADJUSTING THE TIME

Push the CLOCK button *

1to turn the clock on

or off.

1. Push and hold the CLOCK button *

1until

the clock display starts to flash.

2. Push the SEEK/TRACK button *

2to adjust

the hours.

3. Push the TUNE/FF·REW button *

3to

adjust the minutes.

4. Push the CLOCK button *

1again to exit

the clock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock

display after 5 seconds.

CLOCK (if so equipped)

2-40 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (105,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4525

The power outlet is located in the instrument

panel.

CAUTION

.The outlet and plug may be hot

during or immediately after use.

.Do not use with accessories that

exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power

draw. Do not use double adapters or

more than one electrical accessory.

.Use power outlet with the engine

running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

.Avoid using power outlet when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear

window defroster is on.

.This power outlet is not designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit.

.Push the plug in as far as it will go.

If good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

.Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical acces-

sory being used is turned OFF.

.When not in use, be sure to close

the cap. Do not allow water to

contact the outlet.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

.Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used

to prevent spilling the drink. If the

liquid is hot, it can scald you or your

passenger.

.Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

POWER OUTLET STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-41

Information Provided by:

Black plate (106,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4527

Center console

SIC4528

Door (front and rear)

Soft bottle holders

CAUTION

.Do not use bottle holder for any

other objects that could be thrown

about in the vehicle and possibly

injure people during sudden braking

or an accident.

.Do not use bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

SIC4529

CARGO FLOOR BOX

1. To open the cargo floor box, pull the board

2-42 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (107,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4526

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle.

To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.

SIC3505

COAT HOOK

The coat hook is located above the rear side

window.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 2

kg (4 lb) to the hook.

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)

WARNING

.Never put anything on the cargo

cover, no matter how small. Any

object on it could cause an injury in

an accident or sudden stop.

.Do not leave the cargo cover in the

vehicle with it disengaged from the

holder.

.The child restraint top tether strap

may be damaged by contact with

the cargo cover or items in the

luggagearea.Removethecargo

cover from the vehicle or secure it

and any luggage. Your child could

be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the top tether strap is

damaged.

The cargo cover keeps the luggage compart-

ment contents hidden from the outside.

Instruments and controls 2-43

Information Provided by:

Black plate (108,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4584

To install the cargo cover:

1. Open the lift gate.

2. Fix the clip *

Aon the lift gate lower garnish.

3. Fix the clip *

Bon the lift gate side garnish.

4. Hook the rope on the clip located on the lift

gate side garnish.

To remove the cargo cover:

1. Open the lift gate.

2. Remove the rope from the lift gate side

garnish.

3. Remove the clip *

Bfrom the lift gate side

garnish.

4. Remove the clip *

Afrom the lift gate lower

garnish.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

.Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before

closing the windows. Use the win-

dow lock switch to prevent unex-

pected use of the power windows.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols and become trapped in the

window. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is in the ON position, or for about 45

seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s

door is opened during this period of about 45

seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

WINDOWS

2-44 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (109,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4533

Main power window switch (driver’s

side)

1. Window lock button

2. Driver side window

3. Rear left passenger side window

4. Front passenger side window

5. Rear right passenger side window

To open or close the window, push down *

Aor

pull up *

Bthe switch and hold it. The main

switch (driver side switches) will open or close

all the windows.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the lock button *

Cis pushed in, only the

driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it in again to cancel.

SIC4523

Passenger side power window switch

The passenger side switch will open or close

only the corresponding window. To open or

close the window, push down or pull up the

switch and hold it.

Instruments and controls 2-45

Information Provided by:

Black plate (110,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4524

Automatic operation

The automatic operation is available for the

switch that has an mark on its surface.

To fully open or close the window, completely

push down or pull up the switch and release it;

the switch need not be held. The window will

automatically open or close all the way. To stop

the window, just push or lift the switch in the

opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will cause the

window to open or close until the switch is

released.

Auto-reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

window.

If the control unit detects something caught in

the window as it is closing, the window will be

immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the window is closed by automatic operation

when the ignition switch is in the ON position or

for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed

in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window

occurs.

If the windows do not close automatically

If the power window automatic function (closing

only) does not operate properly, perform the

following procedure to initialize the power

window system.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Close the door.

3. Open the window completely by operating

the power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to

close the window, and then hold the switch

more than 3 seconds after the window is

closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Operate

the window by the automatic function to

confirm the initialization is complete.

If the power window automatic function does

not operate properly after performing the pro-

cedure above, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

2-46 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (111,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

.In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle through an open

moonroof. Always use seat belts

and child restraints.

.Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

of the moonroof opening while the

vehicle is in motion or while the

moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

.Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the moonroof before

opening.

.Do not place any heavy object on

the moonroof or surrounding area.

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof only operates when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The automatic moonroof is operational for about

45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is turned

to the OFF position. If the driver’s door or the

passenger’s door is opened during this period of

about 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is

canceled.

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatically when the

moonroof is opened. However, it must be closed

manually.

SIC4624

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push the

switch toward *

1or *

2and release

it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically

open or close all the way. To stop the roof, push

the switch in any direction while it is opening or

closing.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof by pushing the

switch toward *

2. Push the switch toward

2again and release it; it need not be

held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch

toward *

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-47

Information Provided by:

Black plate (112,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

moonroof.

If the control unit detects something caught in

the moonroof when it is closing, the moonroof

will be immediately opened.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the moonroof is closed by automatic operation

when the ignition switch is in the ON position or

for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is

turned to the OFF position.

If the moonroof cannot be closed automatically

when the auto reverse function activates due to

a malfunction, push and hold the switch toward

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the moonroof

occurs.

If the moonroof does not operate

If the moonroof does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initialize the

moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by

repeatedly pushing the switch toward

2. Push and hold the switch toward *

to tilt the moonroof up.

3. Release the moonroof switch after the

moonroof moves slightly up and down.

4. Push and hold the switch toward *

to fully tilt the moonroof down.

5. Check if the moonroof switch operates

normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly after

performing the procedure above, have your

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could

result in a discharged battery.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-48 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (113,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SIC4572

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Operate the map light switch to turn the map

light on or off.

1: ON position

2: OFF position

SIC4573

MAP LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH (if so

equipped)

The map lights control switch has three posi-

tions: ON *

1, OFF *

2and center.

ON position

When the switch is in the ON position *

1, the

map lights will illuminate.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF position *

2, the

map lights will not illuminate, regardless of the

condition.

Center position

When the switch is in the center position, the

map lights will illuminate under the following

conditions:

.ignition switch is placed in the OFF position

(models with Intelligent Key system)

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.the key is removed from the ignition switch

(models without Intelligent Key system)

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-

LOCK button (on the keyfob or

Intelligent Key) or the request switch (In-

telligent Key system equipped model), with

the ignition switch in the LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.any door is opened and then closed with the

ignition switch in the LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.any door is opened with the ignition switch

in the ACC or ON position

— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go off.

The lights will turn off after 15 minutes

when the lights remain illuminated to

prevent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

Instruments and controls 2-49

Information Provided by:

Black plate (114,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

CARGO ROOM LIGHTS

The cargo room lights illuminate when the lift

gate is opened. When the lift gate is closed, the

lights will turn off.

2-50 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (10,1)

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Keys ............................................................... 3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys ............ 3-2

Intelligent Keys (if so equipped)......................... 3-3

Doors.............................................................. 3-4

Locking with key ............................................ 3-4

Locking with inside lock knob ........................... 3-5

Locking with power door lock switch .................. 3-5

Automatic door locks ...................................... 3-6

Child safety rear door lock ............................... 3-6

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) ........... 3-7

How to use remote keyless entry system ............. 3-8

Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) .................. 3-10

Intelligent Key operating range ........................ 3-12

Door locks/unlocks precaution ........................ 3-12

Intelligent Key operation................................. 3-13

Battery saver system..................................... 3-14

Warning lights and audible reminders ............... 3-14

Troubleshooting guide ................................... 3-15

How to use remote keyless entry function .......... 3-17

Hood ............................................................ 3-21

Lift gate ......................................................... 3-22

Fuel-filler door ................................................. 3-23

Opening the fuel-filler door............................. 3-23

Fuel-filler cap .............................................. 3-23

Tilt steering column .......................................... 3-25

Tilt operation............................................... 3-25

Sun visors ...................................................... 3-25

Mirrors........................................................... 3-26

Inside mirror................................................ 3-26

Outside mirrors............................................ 3-26

Vanity mirror................................................ 3-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (118,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe

place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If

you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN

does not record any key numbers so it is very

important to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, this key can be

duplicated by a NISSAN dealer.

SPA2405

1. Master key (2 sets)

2. Key number plate

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-

TEM KEYS

Your vehicle can only be driven with the master

keys which are registered to the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your

vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in

the key head.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can

duplicate your existing key. As many as 5 keys

can be used with one vehicle. You should bring

all the registered keys that you have to a

NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because

the registration process will erase the memory of

all key codes previously registered into the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the

registration process, these components will only

recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System during registration. Any key

that is not given to your dealer at the time of

registration will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the NISSAN Vehicle Im-

mobilizer System key, which contains

an electrical transponder, to come in

contactwithsaltwater.Thiscould

cause the system to malfunction.

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (119,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SPA2406

1. Intelligent Key (2 sets)

2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2 sets)

3. Key number plate

INTELLIGENT KEYS (if so equipped)

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to your

vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-

nents. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. The new

keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer

prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your

vehicle. Since the registration process requires

erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-

nents when registering new keys, be sure to take

all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN

dealer.

CAUTION

.Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when driving. The Intelli-

gent Key is a precision device with a

built-in transmitter. To avoid dama-

ging it, please note the following.

— The Intelligent Key is water

resistant; however, wetting may

damage the Intelligent Key. If

the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is com-

pletely dry.

— Do not bend, drop or strike it

against another object.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key

foranextendedperiodina

place where temperatures ex-

ceed 1408F (608C).

— Do not change or modify the

Intelligent Key.

— Do not use a magnet key holder.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key

near an electric appliance such

as a television set, personal

computer or cellular phone.

— Do not allow the Intelligent Key

to come into contact with water

or salt water, and do not wash it

in a washing machine. This

could affect the system function.

.If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

NISSAN recommends erasing the ID

code of that Intelligent Key. This will

prevent the Intelligent Key from

unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding

the erasing procedure, please con-

tact a NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (120,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SPA2033

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into

the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to

the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the

doors. (See “DOORS” later in this section.)

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-

stalled in the Intelligent Key.

WARNING

.Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping

to prevent persons from being

thrown from the vehicle. This also

helps keep children and others from

unintentionally opening the doors,

and will help keep out intruders.

.Before opening any door, always

look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

SPA2602

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock

or unlock all doors simultaneously.

.Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the

front of the vehicle *

1will lock all doors and

the lift gate.

.Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once

to the rear of the vehicle *

2will unlock the

driver’s door. After returning the key to the

neutral position, turning it to the rear again

within 5 seconds will unlock all doors and

the lift gate.

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (121,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SPA2603

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position *

1then close the

door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the

unlock position *

When locking the door without a key, be

sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

SPA2803

Driver’s armrest

SPA2804

Passenger’s armrest

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will lock

or unlock all the doors. The switches are located

on the driver’s door armrests.

To lock the doors, push the power door lock

switch to the lock position *

1with the driver’s

door open, then close the door.

When locking the door this way, be sure

not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock the doors, push the power door lock

switch to the unlock position *

Lockout protection

Lockout protection function helps to prevent the

keys from being accidentally locked inside the

vehicle.

For models with Intelligent Key system:

.When the power door lock switch is moved

to the lock position with the ignition switch

placed in the ACC or ON position and any

door open, all doors will lock and then

unlock automatically.

.When the power door lock switch is moved

to the lock position with the Intelligent Key

left in the vehicle and any door open, all

doors will unlock automatically and a chime

will sound after the door is closed.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (122,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

For models without Intelligent Key system:

When the power door lock switch is moved to

the lock position with the key in the ignition

switch and any door open, all doors will lock and

then unlock automatically.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

.All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

.All doors unlock automatically when the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position

(models with Intelligent Key system).

.All doors unlock automatically when the key

is removed from the ignition switch (models

without Intelligent Key system).

The automatic unlock function can be

deactivated or activated.

To deactivate or activate the automatic door

unlock system, perform the following procedure.

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Within 20 seconds of performing step 2.

.Push and hold the power door lock

switch to the (UNLOCK) position

for more than 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard warning lights

will flash twice. When deactivated, the

hazard warning lights will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the

OFF and ON position again between each

setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is

deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the

ignition is placed in the OFF position. To unlock

the door manually, use the inside lock knob or

the power door lock switch.

SPA2801

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety rear door locks help prevent the rear

doors from being opened accidentally, espe-

cially when small children are in the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position

1, the rear doors can be opened only

from the outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the unlock

position *

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (123,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors (including

the lift gate), and activate the panic alarm by

using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

key is not left in the vehicle.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of

approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.

(The effective distance depends upon the

conditions around the vehicle.)

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one

vehicle. For information concerning the pur-

chase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

The keyfob will not function in the following

situations.

.When the keyfob is not within the opera-

tional range.

.When the doors are open or not closed

securely.

.When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

.When the battery is discharged.

WARNING

The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-

mits radio waves when the buttons are

pushed. The FAA advises that the radio

waves may affect aircraft navigation

and communication systems. Do not

operate the keyfob while on an air-

plane. Make sure the buttons are not

operated unintentionally when the unit

is stored during a flight.

CAUTION

The following conditions or occur-

rences will damage the keyfob.

.Do not allow the keyfob to become

wet.

.Do not drop the keyfob.

.Do not strike the keyfob sharply

against another object.

.If the outside temperature is below

148F(−108C), the battery of the

Intelligent Key may not function

properly.

.Do not place the keyfob for an

extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob

from unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding the

erasing procedure, please contact a

NISSAN dealer.

If the indicator light on the keyfob does not

illuminate when pushing the buttons, the keyfob

battery may be discharged.

For information regarding the replacement of a

battery, see “KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (124,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SPA2416

1LOCK button

2UNLOCK button

3PANIC button

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Close all the doors.

3. Push the LOCK button *

1on the

keyfob.

4. All the doors will lock.

All of the doors will lock when the LOCK

button is pushed even though a door

remains open.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once.

.When the LOCK button is pushed with

all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes

twice and the horn chirps once as a

reminder that the doors are already locked.

.Operate the door handles to confirm that the

doors have been securely locked.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the UNLOCK button *

2on the

keyfob.

.The driver’s door unlocks.

.The hazard indicator flashes once if all

doors are completely closed.

2. Push the UNLOCK button again within

5 seconds.

.All the doors and the lift gate unlock.

.The hazard indicator flashes once if all

doors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute of pushing the UNLOCK button.

.Opening any door (including the lift gate).

.Placing the ignition switch in the ON

position.

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the alarm to call attention as

follows:

1. Push the PANIC button *

3on the

keyfob for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will

stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

.It has run for 25 seconds, or

.Any of the buttons on the keyfob is

pushed. (Note: the PANIC button must

be pushed for more than 1 second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn

mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK button *

1is pushed, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

When the UNLOCK button *

2is pushed,

the hazard indicator flashes once.

If the horn chirp is not necessary, you can switch

to hazard indicator only mode by following the

switching procedure.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (125,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button

is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the

horn operates.

Mode (Pushing the or button) DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Hazard indicator and horn mode HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (126,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Switching procedure:

To switch the hazard indicator and horn opera-

tion, push the LOCK *

1and UNLOCK

2buttons on the keyfob simultaneously

for more than 2 seconds.

.When the hazard indicator mode is set, the

hazard indicator flashes 3 times.

.When the hazard indicator and horn mode is

set, the hazard indicator flashes once and

the horn chirps once.

WARNING

.Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

.The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are

pushed. The FAA advises that the

radio waves may affect aircraft na-

vigation and communication sys-

tems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an airplane.

Makesurethebuttonsarenot

operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored during a flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door locks using the remote controller function

or pushing the request switch on the vehicle

without taking the key out from a pocket or

purse. The operating environment and/or condi-

tions may affect the Intelligent Key system

operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

.Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the vehi-

cle.

.Never leave the Intelligent Key in

the vehicle when you leave the

vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with

the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The

Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio

waves. Environmental conditions may interfere

with the operation of the Intelligent Key system

under the following operating conditions.

.When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such

as a TV tower, power station and broad-

casting station.

.When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular phone, transceiver, and

CB radio.

.When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

.When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

.When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (127,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

computer.

.When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is

approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv-

ing radio waves, if the key is left near equipment

which transmits strong radio waves, such as

signals from a TV and personal computer, the

battery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a

battery, see “KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered

and used with one vehicle. For information about

the purchase and use of additional Intelligent

Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

.Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-

nents, to come into contact with

water or salt water. This could affect

the system function.

.Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

.Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

.Do not change or modify the Intel-

ligent Key.

.Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is comple-

tely dry.

.If the outside temperature is below

148F(−108C) degrees, the battery of

the Intelligent Key may not function

properly.

.Do not place the Intelligent Key for

an extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).

.Do not attach the Intelligent Key

with a key holder that contains a

magnet.

.Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a mag-

netic field, such as a TV, audio

equipment, personal computers or

cellular phone.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent

the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to

operate the vehicle. For information regarding

the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN deal-

er.

The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For

information about disabling the Intelligent Key

function, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (128,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SPA2074

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING

RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch *

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-

ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent

Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)

from each request switch *

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper, the request

switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone who does not

carry the Intelligent Key to push the request

switch to lock/unlock the doors including the lift

gate.

SPA2407

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-

TION

.Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the In-

telligent Key is outside the vehicle.

.After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

.To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

key with you and then lock the doors.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (129,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

SPA2408

SPA2710

SPA2545

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the key out from your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch (driver’s or front passen-

ger’s) *

Aor lift gate request switch *

Bwithin

the range of operation.

When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard

indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside

chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details,

see “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”

later in this section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (130,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position

and carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the door handle request switch (dri-

ver’s or front passenger’s) *

Aor the lift

gate request switch *

Bwhile carrying the

Intelligent Key with you.*3

4. All the doors and the lift gate will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will lock with the request switch while

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the request switch

while any door is open.

*3: Doors will not lock with the request switch

when the Intelligent Key is left inside the

vehicle. However, when an Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with

another registered Intelligent Key.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the door handle request switch *

Aor

the lift gate request switch *

Bwhile

carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-

side chime sounds once. The corresponding

door or the lift gate will unlock.

3. Push the request switch again within 1

minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-

side chime sounds once again. All the doors

and the lift gate will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute after pushing the request switch while

the doors are locked.

.Opening any door.

.Pushing the ignition switch.

During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all

doors will be locked automatically after another

1 minute.

Opening lift gate

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the lift gate opener switch *

3. The lift gate will unlock.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met for 60

minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the

power supply to prevent battery discharge.

.The ignition switch is in the ACC position,

and

.All doors are closed, and

.The selector lever is in the P (Park) position

(CVT).

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE

REMINDERS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the

Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or

to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen,

chime or beep sounds inside and outside the

vehicle and a warning light illuminates or blinks.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warning

light illuminates or blinks, be sure to check the

vehicle and Intelligent Key.

See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in

this section and “WARNING/INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the

“2. Instruments and controls” section.

Intelligent Key system warning light:

P position selecting warning light:

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (131,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch

to stop the engine

The P position selecting warning light in the

meter illuminates and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously (Continuously Variable

Transmission models).

The selector lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

When shifting the selector lever

to the P (Park) position.

The inside warning chime sounds continuously

(Continuously Variable Transmission models).

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

When opening the driver’s door

to get out of the vehicle The inside warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the ACC

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

When closing the door after get-

ting out of the vehicle

The Intelligent Key system warning light in the

meter blinks in yellow, and the outside chime

sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime

sounds for a few seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

The P position selecting warning light in the

meter illuminates and the outside chime

sounds continuously (Continuously Variable

Transmission models).

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF

position and the selector lever is not in

the P (Park) position.

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position and push the ignition switch to the

OFF position.

When closing the door with the

inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds

and all the doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the request switch

or the LOCK button on the

Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

When pushing the ignition switch

to start the engine

The Intelligent Key system warning light in the

meter blinks in green. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. (See

“KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

The Intelligent Key system warning light in the

meter blinks in yellow and the inside warning

chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (132,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key system warning light in the

meter illuminates in yellow.

It warns of a malfunction with the

Intelligent Key system. Contact a NISSAN dealer.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (133,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY FUNCTION

WARNING

.Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

.The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are

pushed. The FAA advises that the

radio waves may affect aircraft na-

vigation and communication sys-

tems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an airplane.

Makesurethebuttonsarenot

operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored during a flight.

CAUTION

.Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-

nents, to come into contact with

water or salt water. This could affect

the system function.

.Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

.Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

.Do not change or modify the Intel-

ligent Key.

.Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is comple-

tely dry.

.Do not place the Intelligent Key for

an extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).

.Do not attach the Intelligent Key

with a key holder that contains a

magnet.

.Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a mag-

netic field, such as a TV, audio

equipment, personal computers or

cellular phone.

The remote keyless entry function can operate

all door locks using the remote keyless entry

function of the Intelligent Key. The remote

keyless entry function can operate at a distance

of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.

(The operating distance depends upon the

conditions around the vehicle.)

The remote keyless entry function will not

operate:

.When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

.When the doors are open or not closed

securely.

.When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

The remote keyless entry function can also

operate the vehicle alarm.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (134,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SPA2252

1LOCK button

2UNLOCK button

3PANIC button

When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard

indicator will flash and the horn will sound as a

confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard

indicator and horn mode” later in this section.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position

and carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

3. Close all the doors.*2

4. Push the LOCK button *

1on the

Intelligent Key.

5. All the doors and the lift gate will lock.

6. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key

while any door is open.

Operate the door handles to confirm that the

doors have been securely locked.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the UNLOCK button *

2on the

Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

driver’s door will unlock.

3. Push the UNLOCK button again within

1 minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once. All the

doors and the lift gate will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute after pushing the UNLOCK button

while the doors are locked.

.Opening any door (including the lift gate).

.Pushing the ignition switch.

During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK

button is pushed, all doors will be locked

automatically after another 1 minute.

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the alarm to call attention as

follows:

1. Push the PANIC button *

3on the

Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will

stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

.It has run for 25 seconds, or

.Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key

is pushed. (Note: the PANIC button

must be pushed for more than 1

second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn

mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK button *

1is pushed, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

When the UNLOCK button *

2is pushed,

the hazard indicator flashes once.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (135,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

If horns are not necessary, the system can be

switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes

twice. When the UNLOCK button is

pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the

horn operates.

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch

or lift gate request switch

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME - once

Pushing or button HAZARD - twice

HORN - once HAZARD - once

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch

or lift gate request switch

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

Pushing or button HAZARD - twice

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (136,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Switching procedure:

To switch the hazard indicator and horn (chime)

operation, push the LOCK *

1and UN-

LOCK *

2buttons on the Intelligent Key

simultaneously for more than 2 seconds.

.When the hazard indicator mode is set, the

hazard indicator flashes 3 times.

.When the hazard indicator and horn mode is

set, the hazard indicator flashes once and

the horn chirps once.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (137,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

.Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the

hood to fly open and result in an

accident.

.If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

SPA2798

When opening the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handle *

1located

below the instrument panel; the hood will

then spring up slightly.

2. Locate the lever *

2in between the hood

and grille, and push the lever sideways with

your fingertips.

3. Raise the hood *

4. Remove the support rod *

4and insert it

into the slot *

Hold the coated part *

Awhen removing or

resetting the support rod. Avoid direct

contact with the metal parts, as they may

be hot immediately after the engine has

been stopped.

When closing the hood:

1. Return the support rod to its original

position.

2. Slowly move the hood down to latch the

lock.

3. Push the hood down to lock the hood

securely into place.

HOOD

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (138,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

.Always be sure the lift gate has

been closed securely to prevent it

from opening while driving.

.Do not drive with the lift gate open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

See “EXHAUST GAS (carbon mon-

oxide)” in the “5. Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

.Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

before closing the lift gate.

SPA2799

To open the lift gate, unlock it and push the lift

gate opener switch *

A. Pull up the lift gate to

open.

The lift gate can be unlocked by:

— pushing the UNLOCK button on the

keyfob or the Intelligent Key (if so equipped)

twice.

— pushing the lift gate request switch with the

Intelligent Key carried with you (if so

equipped).

— pushing the power door lock switch to the

unlock position.

— inserting the key into the driver’s door key

cylinder and turning it to the rear of the

vehicle twice.

LIFT GATE

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (139,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 10/ 25

SPA2336

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, pull the release

handle located below the instrument panel. To

lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.

SPA2800

FUEL-FILLER CAP

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise *

to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder *

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise *

2until a

single click is heard.

WARNING

.Gasoline is extremely flammable

and highly explosive under certain

conditions. You could be burned or

seriously injured if it is misused or

mishandled. Always stop engine

and do not smoke or allow open

flames or sparks near the vehicle

when refueling.

.Do not attempt to top off the fuel

tank after the fuel pump nozzle

shuts off automatically. Continued

refueling may cause fuel overflow,

resulting in fuel spray and possibly

a fire.

.Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It

has a built-in safety valve needed

for proper operation of the fuel

system and emission control sys-

tem. An incorrect cap can result in a

serious malfunction and possible

injury. It could also cause the mal-

function indicator light to come on.

.Never pour fuel into the throttle

body to attempt to start your vehi-

cle.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (140,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.Do not fill a portable fuel container

in the vehicle or trailer. Static elec-

tricity can cause an explosion of

flammable liquid, vapor or gas in

any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the

risk of serious injury or death when

filling portable fuel containers:

— Always place the container on

the ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices

when filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

— Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

.If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid

paint damage.

.Insert the cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube, then tighten until the

fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tight-

en the fuel-filler cap properly may

cause the malfunction indicator

light (MIL) to illuminate. If the

light illuminates because the fuel-

filler cap is loose or missing, tighten

or install the cap and continue to

drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving

trips. If the light does not turn

off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by a NISSAN deal-

er.

For additional information, see

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”

in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

.The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

message will be displayed if the

fuel-filler cap is not properly tigh-

tened. Failure to tighten the fuel-

filler cap properly after the LOOSE

FUEL CAP warning message is dis-

played may cause the Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to

illuminate.

SPA2809

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message is

displayed on the trip computer when the fuel-

filler cap is not tightened correctly after the

vehicle has been refueled. To turn off the

warning message, do the following procedure:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

previously described as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Push the trip computer mode switch *

Afor

about 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL

CAP warning message after tightening the

fuel cap.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (141,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

SPA2808

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever down *

1and adjust the

steering wheel up or down *

2to the desired

position.

Pull the lock lever up *

3securely to lock the

steering wheel in place.

SIC2872

1. To block out glare from the front, swing

down the sun visor *

2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun

visor from the center mount and swing it to

the side *

TILT STEERING COLUMN SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (142,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SPA2447

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the angle of the inside mirror to the

desired position.

SPA2143

The night position *

1will reduce glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position *

2when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when ne-

cessary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

SPA2214

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is located at

the lower part of the instrument panel.

MIRRORS

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (143,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

The outside mirror will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Move the switch right *

1or left *

2to select

the right or left side mirror, then adjust *

3using

the control switch.

Defrosting outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear

window defroster switch is operated. (See

“REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR

DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments

and controls” section.)

SPA1829

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the

rear of the vehicle.

SIC3869

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun

visor and pull up the cover.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (144,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

MEMO

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (13,1)

4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone

systems

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Safety note ....................................................... 4-2

Control panel buttons — color screen with

navigation system (if so equipped) ......................... 4-2

How to use touch screen................................. 4-3

How to use the BACK button ........................... 4-5

How to use brightness control and display ON/

OFF button................................................... 4-5

How to use the setup button ............................ 4-5

RearView monitor (if so equipped) ......................... 4-9

How to read the displayed lines......................... 4-9

Difference between predicted and actual

distances ................................................... 4-10

How to adjust the screen............................... 4-12

Operating tips ............................................. 4-12

Ventilators ...................................................... 4-13

Center ventilators ......................................... 4-13

Side ventilators............................................ 4-13

Heater and air conditioner .................................. 4-14

Manual air conditioner (if so equipped).............. 4-14

Automatic air conditioner

(with Integrated Control System)...................... 4-18

Setting climate eco....................................... 4-20

Operating tips ............................................. 4-20

In-cabin microfilter........................................ 4-20

Servicing air conditioner ................................ 4-21

Audio system .................................................. 4-21

Audio operation precautions ........................... 4-21

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player (Type A) ............................................ 4-33

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player (Type B) ............................................ 4-41

iPod®player operation ................................... 4-46

CD/USB memory care and cleaning ................. 4-48

Steering wheel switch for audio control ............. 4-49

Antenna ..................................................... 4-50

Car phone or CB radio...................................... 4-51

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System .................. 4-52

Regulatory information ................................... 4-53

Using the system ......................................... 4-53

Control buttons ........................................... 4-56

Getting started ............................................ 4-56

List of voice commands ................................. 4-58

Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode ....................... 4-61

Troubleshooting guide ................................... 4-64

Information Provided by:

Black plate (146,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

.Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in

accidents, fire, or electric shock.

.Do not use this system if you notice

any abnormality, such as a frozen

screen or lack of sound. Continued

use of the system may result in

accident, fire or electric shock.

.In case you notice any foreign

object in the system hardware, spill

liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell

coming from it, stop using the

system immediately and contact

your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignor-

ing such conditions may lead to

accidents, fire, or electric shock.

Do not attempt to operate the system in

extreme temperature conditions [below

−48F(−208C) and above 1588F(708C)].

Operating this system under these condi-

tions may result in system malfunctions.

SAA3377

1. (brightness control) button (P.4-5)

2. Display screen

3. MAP button*

4. NAV button*

5. TRAF button*

6. SETUP button (P.4-5)

7. BACK button (P.4-5)

8. TUNE/SCROLL knob (P.4-41)

9. Power button/Volume control knob (P.4-41)

*For navigation system control buttons, refer to

the separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-

ual.

SAFETY NOTE

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-2 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (147,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

When you use this system, make sure the

engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will discharge the battery, and the

engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a

key shown only on the display. These keys can

be selected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN

CAUTION

.The glass screen on the liquid

crystal display may break if it is hit

with a hard or sharp object. If the

glass breaks, do not touch the liquid

crystalline material, which contains

a small amount of mercury. In case

of contact with skin, wash immedi-

ately with soap and water.

.To clean the display, never use a

rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thin-

ner or any kind of solvent or paper

towel with a chemical cleaning

agent. They will scratch or deterio-

rate the panel.

.Do not splash any liquid such as

water or car fragrance on the dis-

play. Contact with liquid will cause

the system to malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions

cannot be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then

operate the navigation system.

WARNING

.ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

.Avoid using vehicle features that

coulddistractyou.Ifdistracted,

you could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

SAA3422

Touch screen operation

Selecting the item:

Touch an item to select. For example, to select

the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key *

1on

the screen.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (148,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA3387

Adjusting the item:

For screens where an item can be adjusted

incrementally, such as when adjusting the bass

and treble for the audio system, touch the “+”

key *

1or the “−” key *

2to adjust the settings

of an item.

When there are more items than can be

displayed on one screen, touch the up arrow

3to scroll up the page or touch the down

arrow *

4to scroll down the page.

SAA3388

Other items are adjusted by selecting one of a

set number of conditions. For example, the

Display Mode can be set to “Automatic”, “Day”

or “Night”. To adjust this type of item, touch the

item *

1. The item will cycle through the

available settings and the red indicator lights

to the left of the setting condition *

2will come

on or turn off accordingly.

SAA3389

Inputting characters:

Touch the letter key *

There are some options available when inputting

characters.

.123/ABC:

Changes the available character set to

numbers.

.Space:

Inserts a space.

.Delete:

Deletes the last inputted character with one

4-4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (149,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to

delete all of the characters.

.OK:

Completes the character input.

Touch screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or

detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe

the screen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON

Push the BACK button to return to the

previous screen.

HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON-

TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON

To change the display brightness, push the

button. Pushing the button again will change the

display to the day or the night display.

If no operation is performed within 5 seconds,

the display will return to the previous display.

Push and hold the button for more than two

seconds to turn the display off. Push the button

again to turn the display on.

SAA3390

HOW TO USE THE SETUP BUTTON

When the SETUP button is pushed, the Setup

screen will appear on the display. You can select

and/or adjust several functions, features and

modes that are available for your vehicle.

SAA3423

Audio setup

Select the “Audio” key to adjust the following

items to the preferred setting. These settings

can also be displayed by pushing the AUDIO

button (TUNE/SCROLL knob).

Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade:

Controls the sound of the audio system. Balance

adjusts the sound between the left and right

speakers. Fade adjusts the sound between the

front and rear speakers.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (150,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA3424

Speed Volume:

Controls the level to which the volume is

adjusted as the vehicle’s driving speed changes.

Choose a setting between 1 and 5 or choose 0

to disable the feature entirely.

AUX Level:

Controls the volume level of incoming sound

when an auxiliary device is connected to the

system. Available options are Quiet, Medium

and Loud.

Navigation setup

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

XM setup

For XM setup, refer to “AUDIO SYSTEM” later in

this section.

SAA3391

System setup

Select the “System” key to select and/or adjust

various functions of the system. A screen with

additional options will appear.

4-6 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (151,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA3392

Display:

Select the “Display” key to adjust the appear-

ance of the display. The following settings can

be adjusted:

.Brightness:

The brightness of the display can be set to Very

Bright, Bright, Default, Dark or Very Dark. Touch

the “Brightness” key to cycle through the

options.

.Display Mode:

The display can be adjusted to fit the level of

lighting in the vehicle. Touch the “Display Mode”

key to cycle through the options. “Day” and

“Night” modes are suited for the respective

times of day, while “Automatic” controls the

display automatically.

.Scroll Direction:

The direction that menus scroll can be adjusted.

Choose either “up” or “down”.

SAA3393

Clock:

Select the “Clock” key to adjust the time and the

appearance of the clock on the display. The

following settings can be adjusted:

.Time Format:

The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.

.Use GPS Clock:

When this setting is activated, the clock is set

and continually updated via the GPS used by

the Navigation System.

.Set Clock Manually:

When this setting is activated, the clock can be

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (152,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

set manually. Touch the “+” or “−” key to adjust

the hours and minutes up or down.

.Daylight Savings Time:

When this setting is activated, daylight savings

time is on. Touch the “Daylight Savings Time”

key to toggle the setting on or off.

.Time Zone:

Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

SAA3395

Language:

Select the “Language” key to adjust the

language used by the system. The language

can be set to English, Franc¸ais or Espan

˜ol.

Touch click:

Select the “Touch Click” key to toggle the touch

click feature on or off. When activated, a click

sound will be heard every time a key on the

screen is touched.

Beep tones:

Select the “Beep Tones” key to toggle the beep

tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep

sound will be heard when a pop-up message

appears on the screen or a button on the unit

(such as the button) is pressed and held

for two seconds.

Reset all settings/memory:

Select the “Reset All Settings/Memory” key to

return all settings to default and to clear the

memory.

Traffic setup

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

4-8 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (153,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

When the selector lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows

the view to the rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in

detecting large stationary objects to help avoid

damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect

small objects below the bumper and may not

detect objects close to the bumper or on the

ground.

WARNING

.The rear view camera is a conve-

nience but it is not a substitute for

proper backing up. Always turn and

check that it is safe to do so before

backing up. Always back up slowly.

.Objects viewed in the RearView

Monitor differ from actual distance

because a wide-angle lens is used.

Objects in the RearView Monitor

will appear visually opposite than

when viewed in the rear view and

outside mirrors.

.Make sure that the lift gate is

securely closed when backing up.

.Underneath the bumper and the

corner areas of the bumper cannot

be viewed on the RearView Monitor

because of its monitoring range

limitation.

.Do not put anything on the rear view

camera.

.When washing the vehicle with

high-pressure water, be sure not to

spray it around the camera. Other-

wise, water may enter the camera

unit causing water condensation on

the lens, a malfunction, fire or an

electric shock.

.Do not strike the camera. It is a

precision instrument. Otherwise, it

may malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric

shock.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.

SAA2776

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

bumper line *

Aare displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

.Red line *

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

.Yellow line *

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

.Green line *

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

.Green line *

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (154,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Vehicle width guide lines *

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle width

guide line should be used as a reference only

when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface.

The distance viewed on the monitor is for

reference only and may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle and dis-

played objects.

SAA1978

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1 m) to the

place *

A, but the actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on

the hill is the place *

B. Note that any object on

the hill is viewed in the monitor further than it

appears.

4-10 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (155,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA1979

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown further than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1 m) to the

place *

A, but the actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on

the hill is the place *

B. Note that any object on

the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it

appears.

SAA3440

Backing up near a projecting object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object

in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the

object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (156,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA3475

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position *

Cis shown further than the

position *

Bin the display. However, the

position *

Cis actually at the same distance

as the position *

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position *

Aif

the object projects over the actual backing up

course.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN

To adjust the Brightness and Contrast of the

RearView Monitor, push the SETUP button until

the desired mode is displayed with the RearView

Monitor on, and turn the TUNE control dial to

adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen

to the preferred level.

OPERATING TIPS

.When the selector lever is shifted to the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto-

matically changes to the RearView Monitor

mode. However, the radio can be heard.

.It may take some time until the RearView

Monitor or the normal screen is displayed

after the selector lever has been shifted to R

from another position or to another position

from R. Objects may be distorted momenta-

rily until the RearView Monitor screen is

displayed completely.

.When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display

objects. This is not a malfunction.

.When strong light directly enters the cam-

era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

This is not a malfunction.

.Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

.The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light. This is not a malfunction.

.The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from those of

the actual object.

.Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark place or at night. This is not a

malfunction.

.If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,

the RearView Monitor may not clearly dis-

play objects. Clean the camera.

.Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to

clean the camera. This will cause discolora-

tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth

dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent

and then wipe with a dry cloth.

.Do not damage the camera as the monitor

screen may be adversely affected.

.Do not use wax on the camera window.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with mild detergent diluted with

water.

4-12 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (157,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA3338

CENTER VENTILATORS

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators as

illustrated.

Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by

moving the center knob (up/down and left/right)

until the preferred position is achieved.

SAA2381

SIDE VENTILATORS

Open or close the vents, and adjust the air flow

direction of ventilators as illustrated.

VENTILATORS

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (158,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

.The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

.Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. On

hot, sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

.Do not use the recirculation mode

for long periods as it may cause the

interior air to become stale and the

windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the heater and the

air conditioner system.

SAA3447

1. Air intake lever (Outside air circulation /Air

recirculation )

2. Air flow control dial

3. Fan speed control dial

4. A/C (Air Conditioner) button

5. Temperature control dial

6. Rear window defroster button (See “REAR

WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROS-

TER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.)

To turn off the heater and air conditioner, turn the

fan speed control dial to the OFF (0)

position.

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER (if so

equipped)

Controls

Outside air circulation:

Move the air intake lever to the position.

The air flow is drawn from outside the vehicle.

Air recirculation:

Move the air intake lever to the position.

The air flow is circulated inside the vehicle.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

4-14 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (159,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Air flow control:

Turn the air flow control dial to change the air

flow mode.

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators.

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.

— Air flows from the defroster and foot

outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the defroster

outlets.

.When the or position is selected,

the air conditioner will automatically turn on.

This will dehumidify the air and help to defog

the windows. The A/C indicator light will

illuminate when the air conditioner automa-

tically turns on. The air conditioner and A/C

indicator light will remain on in all flow

control modes until the A/C button is

pushed or the fan control dial is turned to off.

Fan speed control:

Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise to

increase the fan speed.

Turn the fan speed control dial counter-

clockwise to decrease the fan speed.

A/C (Air Conditioner) operation:

Push the A/C button to turn on or off the air

conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the

A/C indicator light on the button illuminates.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature. Turn the dial between the

middle and the right position to select the hot

temperature. Turn the dial between the middle

and the left position to select the cool tempera-

ture.

Heater operation

Heating:

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot

outlets.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position between the middle and the

hot (right) position.

Ventilation:

This mode directs outside air to the side and

center ventilators.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

Defrosting or defogging:

This mode directs the air to the defroster outlets

to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position between the middle and the

hot (right) position.

.To remove frost from the outside surface of

the windshield quickly, turn the temperature

control dial to the maximum hot position and

the fan speed control dial to the

maximum position.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (160,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.When the position is selected, the air

conditioner will automatically turn on. This

will dehumidify the air and help to defog the

windows. The A/C indicator light will illumi-

nate when the air conditioner automatically

turns on. The air conditioner and A/C

indicator light will remain on in all flow

control modes until the A/C button is

pushed or the fan control dial is turned to off.

Bi-level heating:

This mode directs cool air from the side and

center vents and warm air from the foot outlets.

When the temperature control dial is turned to

the maximum hot or cool position, the air

between the ventilators and the foot outlets is

the same temperature.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position.

Heating and defogging:

This mode heats the interior and defogs the

windows.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position.

When the position is selected, the air

conditioner will automatically turn on. This will

dehumidify the air and help to defog the

windows. The A/C indicator light will illuminate

when the air conditioner automatically turns on.

The air conditioner and A/C indicator light will

remain on in all flow control modes until the A/C

button is pushed or the fan control dial is turned

to off.

Air conditioner operation

The air conditioner system should be operated

for approximately 10 minutes at least once a

month. This helps prevent damage to the air

conditioner system due to the lack of lubrication.

Cooling:

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator

light will illuminate.)

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position between the middle and the

cool (left) position.

.For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, move the air intake lever to

the position. Be sure to move the air

intake lever to the position for normal

cooling.

.A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air

is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

Dehumidified heating:

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the

air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

4-16 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (161,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

desired position.

4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator

light will illuminate.)

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position between the middle and the

hot (right) position.

Dehumidified defogging:

This mode is used to defog the windows and

dehumidify the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position.

When the position is selected, the air

conditioner will automatically turn on. This will

dehumidify the air and help to defog the

windows. The A/C indicator light will illuminate

when the air conditioner automatically turns on.

The air conditioner and A/C indicator light will

remain on in all flow control modes until the A/C

button is pushed or the fan control dial is turned

to off.

SAA3443

1. AUTO button/Temperature control dial

2. OFF button

3. A/C button

4. CLIMATE button

5. Display screen*

6. Air flow control buttons

7. Fan speed control dial

8. Front defroster button

9. Air intake button (Outside air circulation /Air

recirculation )

10. Rear window defroster button (See “REAR

WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROS-

TER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and con-

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (162,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

trols” section.)

*: Temperature is displayed 8F (US) or 8C (Canada).

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER (with

Integrated Control System)

Automatic operation (AUTO)

The AUTO mode may be used year-round as the

system automatically controls constant tempera-

ture, air flow distribution and fan speed.

To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push

the CLIMATE button to change to the Climate

Control Mode, then push the OFF button.

Cooling and dehumidified heating:

1. Push the AUTO button. (The AUTO indicator

will be displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

preferred temperature. The temperature

range is between 608F (188C) and 908F

(328C).

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

Heating (A/C off):

1. Push the CLIMATE button to change to the

Climate Control Mode.

2. Push the AUTO button. (The AUTO indicator

will be displayed.)

3. If the A/C indicator light illuminates, push the

A/C button. (The A/C indicator light will turn

off.)

4. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

preferred temperature. The temperature

range is between 608F (188C) and 908F

(328C).

.Do not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Doing so

may cause the temperature to not be

controlled properly.

.If the windows fog up, use dehumidified

heating by pushing the A/C button (the

A/C indicator light will illuminate).

Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:

1. Push the front defroster button. (The

indicator light will illuminate.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

preferred temperature.

.To remove moisture or fog on the front

window quickly, set the temperature to

the high temperature and the fan speed

to their maximum level.

.After the windshield is cleared, push the

front defroster button again. (The

indicator light will turn off.)

.When the front defroster button is

pushed, the air conditioner will auto-

matically turn on to defog the wind-

shield. The outside air circulation mode

will be selected to improve the defog-

ging performance.

.When the position is selected, the

air recirculation mode cannot be turned

on to prevent the windows from being

fogged up.

Manual operation

The manual mode can be used to control the

heater and air conditioner to your desired

settings.

To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push

the OFF button.

If the Drive Mode is indicated on the screen,

push the CLIMATE button to change to the

Climate Control Mode, then push the OFF

button.

Fan speed control:

Turn the fan speed control dial to adjust the

fan speed.

Air flow control:

Pushing the preferred air flow control button the

air outlet to:

4-18 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (163,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators.

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.

— Air flows from the defroster outlets and

foot outlets.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

preferred temperature.

The temperature range is between 608F (188C)

and 908F (328C).

Air recirculation:

Push the air intake button to change the air

circulation mode. When the indicator light

illuminates, the flowing air is recirculated inside

the vehicle.

.When the or position is selected,

the air recirculation mode cannot be turned

on to prevent the windows from being

fogged up.

Outside air circulation:

Push the air intake button to change the air

circulation mode. When the indicator light

illuminates, the flowing air is drawn from outside

the vehicle.

Automatic air intake control:

Push and hold the outside air circulation “ ”/

air recirculation “ ” button for more than 1.5

seconds to set the automatic control between

the outside air circulation and air recirculation

modes.

When the “ ”or“ ” position is selected,

the air recirculation mode does not activate.

When setting the automatic control mode, the

indicator lights “ ” and “ ” will blink twice

indicating that the system is in the automatic

control mode.

SAA3378

Air conditioner mode screen

SAA3379

Drive mode screen

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (164,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Displaying Climate control

When in “Climate Control Mode”, the selected

temperature and airflow, and automatic mode or

manual mode are indicated on the display.

When in “Drive Mode”, the same items as above

are indicated, but on the bottom of the display.

To switch to “Climate Control Mode”, press the

CLIMATE control mode select button.

SETTING CLIMATE ECO

When in “Drive Mode”, CLIMATE ECO can be

switched on or off. When CLIMATE ECO is

switched on, the climate control system oper-

ates to enhance fuel economy.

See “Setting the climate ECO mode” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.

SAA2368

SAA3441

OPERATING TIPS

.When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flow

from the foot outlets may not operate for a

maximum of 150 seconds. This is not a

malfunction. After the coolant temperature

warms up, air will flow normally from the foot

outlets.

.The automatic air conditioner is equipped

with sensors as illustrated. The sensors *

and *

Bon the instrument panel help

maintain a constant temperature. Do not

put anything on or around these sensors.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The air conditioning system is equipped with an

in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,

dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,

defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the

filter in accordance with the specified main-

tenance intervals listed in the separate main-

tenance booklet. To replace the filter, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow

decreases significantly or if windows fog

up easily when operating the heater or air

conditioning system.

4-20 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (165,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN is

charged with a refrigerant designed with the

environment in mind. This refrigerant will not

harm the earth’s ozone layer. Special char-

ging equipment and lubricant are required when

servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using

improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause

severe damage to your air conditioner system.

(See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section for air conditioner

system refrigerant and lubricant recommenda-

tions.)

A NISSAN dealer will be able to service your

environmentally friendly air conditioner system.

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant under

high pressure. To avoid personal injury,

any air conditioner service should be

done only by an experienced technician

with the proper equipment.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Radio

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and push the PWR (power/VOL (vo-

lume)) control to turn on the radio. If you listen to

the radio with the engine not running, the ignition

switch should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external

influences. Intermittent changes in reception

quality normally are caused by these external

influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the

vehicle may influence radio reception

quality.

Radio reception:

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance

radio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the

quality of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These

characteristics are completely normal in a given

reception area, and do not indicate any mal-

function in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change

because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other

vehicles can work against ideal reception.

Described below are some of the factors that

can affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the

device in a different location may reduce or

eliminate the noise.

AUDIO SYSTEM

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (166,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA0306

FM radio reception:

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30

miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single

station) FM having slightly more range than

stereo FM. External influences may sometimes

interfere with FM station reception even if the

FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The

strength of the FM signal is directly related to the

distance between the transmitter and receiver.

FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting

many of the same characteristics as light. For

example they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,

usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter, static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the

treble setting to reduce the treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-

flected signals reach the receiver at the same

time. The signals may cancel each other,

resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM radio reception:

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics. AM signals are also

subject to interference as they travel from

transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped):

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a

malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with the

satellite radio ON and the vehicle away from any

metal or large buildings for the satellite radio to

receive all of the necessary data.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is

not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite

radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite

antenna.

A buildup of ice on the satellite radio antenna

can affect satellite radio performance. Remove

the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

4-22 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (167,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA0480

Compact Disc (CD) player

.Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD player.

.During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the

humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

.The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

.The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the passenger compartment

temperature is extremely high. De-

crease the temperature before use.

.Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

.Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

.CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints,

or that have pin holes may not work

properly.

.The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

—Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

—Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

—Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

.Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion.

—3.1 in (8 cm) discs

—CDs that are not round

—CDs with a paper label

—CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

.This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to

record or burn CDs.

.If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

Check Disc:

—Confirm that the CD is inserted

correctly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

—Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

Push Eject:

This is an error due to the temperature

inside the player is too high. Remove

the CD by pushing the EJECT button,

and after a short time reinsert the CD.

The CD can be played when the tem-

perature of the player returns to nor-

mal.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (168,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Unplayable Track:

The file is unplayable in this audio

system (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Interface System for iPod®(models

without USB port) (if so equipped)

.Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed

properly on the vehicle audio display. We

recommend using English language char-

acters with an iPod®.

.Large video podcast files cause slow

responses in the iPod®. The vehicle audio

display may momentarily black out, but it will

soon recover.

.If the iPod®automatically selects large video

podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle audio display may momentarily black

out, but it will soon recover.

.Improperly plugging in the iPod®may cause

a checkmark to be displayed on and off

(flickering). Always make sure that the iPod®

is connected properly.

.The iPod nano®(2nd Generation) will

continue to fast forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

.An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using the iPod

nano®(2nd Generation).

.Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on the iPod®.

.The iPod nano®(1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is

connected during a seek operation. In this

case, please manually reset the iPod®.

.If you are using an iPod®(3rd Generation

with Dock connector), do not use very long

names for the song title, album name or

artist name to avoid the iPod®from resetting

itself.

.Be careful not to do the following, or the

cable could be damaged and a loss of

function may occur.

— Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40

mm) radius minimum).

— Twist the cable excessively (more than

180 degrees).

— Pull or drop the cable.

— Store objects with sharp edges in the

storage where the cable is stored.

— Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.

.Do not connect the cable to the iPod®if the

cable and/or connectors are wet. It may

damage the iPod®.

.If the cable and connectors are exposed to

water, allow the cable and/or connectors to

dry completely before connecting the cable

to the iPod®(wait 24 hours for it to dry).

.If the connector is exposed to fluids other

than water, evaporative residue may cause a

short between the connector pins. In this

case, replace the cable, otherwise damage

to the iPod®and a loss of function may

occur.

.If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,

connectors cracked, contamination such as

liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do

not use the cable and contact a NISSAN

dealer to replace the cable with a new one.

.When not in use for extended periods of

time, store the cable in a clean, dust free

environment at room temperature and with-

out direct sun exposure.

.Do not use the cable for any other purposes

other than its intended use in the vehicle.

.iPod®charging is only possible for devices

that support charging via a FireWire®con-

nection.

* 12V-charge iPod®s are not chargeable with

this system.

*iPod

®, iPhone®and FireWire®are trademarks

of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

4-24 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (169,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

countries.

Compact Disc (CD) with MP3 or WMA

(if so equipped)

Explanation of terms:

.MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the

file size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sam-

pling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant and

irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the

human ear doesn’t hear.

.WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

.Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music files.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

.Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

.Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is

called a multisession.

.ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, album title,

encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.

ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows®and Windows Media®are regis-

tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States of America

and other countries of Microsoft Corporation

of the USA.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) device (if so

equipped)

This system supports various USB memory

sticks, USB hard drives and iPod®players.

There are some USB devices which may not

be supported with this system.

.Make sure that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB connector.

.Do not force the memory stick or USB cable

into the USB connector. This could damage

the connector.

.During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to humidity. If this

occurs, remove the USB device and dehu-

midify or ventilate the USB player comple-

tely.

.The USB player sometimes cannot function

when the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-

perature before use.

.Do not leave USB memory in a place prone

to static electricity or where the air condi-

tioner blows directly. The data in the USB

memory may be damaged.

.The vehicle is not equipped with a USB

memory stick.

.A USB device cannot be formatted with this

system. To format a USB device, use a

personal computer.

.Partitioned USB devices may not be played

correctly.

.Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (170,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

properly on the vehicle center screen. Using

English language characters with a USB

device is recommended.

.Do not connect a USB device if a connector

or cable is wet. Allow the cable and/or

connectors to dry completely before con-

necting the USB device. If the connector is

exposed to fluids other than water, evapora-

tive residue may cause a short between the

connector pins.

.Large video podcast files cause slow

responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center

display may momentarily black out, but it will

soon recover.

.If an iPod®automatically selects large video

podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle center display may momentarily

black out, but it will soon recover.

.Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on an iPod®.

.An iPod nano®(1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is

connected during a seek operation. In this

case, please manually reset the iPod®.

.An iPod nano®(2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

.An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using the iPod

nano®(2nd Generation)

iPod®is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA/

AAC) (if so equipped)

Explanation of terms:

.MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track can reduce the file size by

approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1

kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no

perceptible loss in quality. The compression

reduces certain parts of sound that seem

inaudible to most people.

.WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

.AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding

(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.

Audio files that have been encoded with

AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver

a higher quality of sound than MP3.

.Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

.Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

.Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is

called a multisession.

.ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, album title,

encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.

ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows®and Windows Media®are regis-

tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States of America

4-26 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (171,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

and/or other countries.

SAA1025

Playback order chart

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or

WMA files is as illustrated.

.The names of folders not containing MP3 or

WMA files are not shown in the display.

.If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

.The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software.

Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (172,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Specification chart (for FM-AM-SAT Radio with Compact Disc (CD) player (Type A)):

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.

USB memory: FAT16, FAT32

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1 Audio Layer 3

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR (Ver.9)*4

AAC

Version MPEG-AAC

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

Tag information (Song title and Artist name)

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

AAC tag (AAC only)

Folder levels

CD, CD-R, CD-RW Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

USB Folder levels: 8, Folders 255, Files: 2500 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Memory size: 4GB

Text character number limitation 26 characters

Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big

Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

4-28 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (173,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

Information Provided by:

Black plate (174,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Specification chart (for FM-AM-SAT Radio with Compact Disc (CD) player (Type B)):

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not

supported.

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big

Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

4-30 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (175,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Troubleshooting guide (for FM-AM-SAT Radio with Compact Disc (CD) player (Type A)):

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the

player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will

be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)” or “.M4A (.m4a)” cannot be played. In addition, the

character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of

compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time before

the music starts playing. If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not

match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song

when playing.

If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright

protection, the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in the

desired order.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.

Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31

Information Provided by:

Black plate (176,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Troubleshooting guide (for FM-AM-SAT Radio with Compact Disc (CD) player (Type B)):

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be

played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of

characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time before

the music starts playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the

music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not

match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song

when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by

Songs do not play back in the

desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired

order.

4-32 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (177,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA2782

1. MUTE button

2. DISP (display)/TEXT button

3. FM·AM radio band select button

4. CD PLAY button

5. Radio station preset buttons

6. iPod®button

7. AUX (auxiliary)/SAT band select button

8. Audio display

9. CLOCK button

10. CD EJECT button

11. iPod®MENU button

12. SEEK/TRACK button

13. ENTER button

14 BACK button

15. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume) control knob

16 AUX IN jack

17. AUDIO button

18. TUNE/FF·REW FOLDER button

19. SCAN/RPT (repeat) button

FM-AM-SAT* RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A)

For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO

OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this

section.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is

not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

It may take some time to receive the activation

signal after subscribing to the XM Satellite

Radio. After receiving the activation signal, an

available channel list will be automatically

updated in the radio. For XM®,switchthe

ignition position from LOCK to ACC to update

the channel list.

*: if so equipped

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically in both

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

Information Provided by:

Black plate (178,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

radio reception and CD playback.

ON·OFF/Volume control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, and then push the PWR button while

the system is off to call up the normal mode

(radio, CD, AUX and iPod®) which was playing

immediately before the system was turned off.

While the system is on, pushing the PWR button

turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

MUTE button:

Push the button to mute the audio sound.

Push the button again to release the mute

setting.

AUDIO button:

Push the AUDIO button to change the selecting

mode as follows.

Push the TUNE ( , ) or SEEK ( ,

) button to adjust Bass and Treble to the

desired level. Use the TUNE or SEEK button

also to adjust Fade or Balance modes. Fade

adjusts the sound level between the front and

rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound

between the right and left speakers.

To turn the beep sound off or on, push the TUNE

or SEEK button until the desired mode is

displayed. This turns on or off the beep sound

when audio buttons are pushed.

To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (Spd

Sen Vol) mode to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH,

push the TUNE or SEEK button until the desired

mode is displayed.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, push the AUDIO button repeatedly

until the normal mode display reappears. Other-

wise, the normal mode display will automatically

reappear after approximately 5 seconds.

CLOCK button:

Push the CLOCK button to turn on or off the

CLOCK display.

See “CLOCK” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section for the detailed clock adjust-

ment operation.

SAA3490

Radio operation

Radio (FM/AM) band select:

Pushing the FM·AM radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

AM ?FM1 ?FM2 ?AM

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

When the radio band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the station last

played.

4-34 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (179,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Radio (SAT) band select:

Pushing the button will change the band as

follows:

AUX (if connected portable device) ?XM1 ?

XM2 ?XM3 ?AUX (if connected portable

device)

The last channel played will also come on when

the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

When the radio band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the station last

played.

TUNE (Tuning):

.For AM and FM radio

Push the TUNE button or for

manual tuning. To move quickly through the

stations, push and hold the TUNE button.

.For XM Satellite Radio

Push the TUNE button or to seek

stations from all of the categories when any

CAT is not selected.

SEEK tuning CATEGORY:

.For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK button or to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

.For XM satellite radio

Push the or to tune to the first

station of the next or previous category.

During satellite radio reception, the following

notices will be displayed under certain condi-

tions.

.NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the

SAT tuner is connected.)

.OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)

.CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection

error)

.LOADING (When the initial setting is

performed)

.UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-

scription is not active)

.INVALID CH (Invalid channel is received.)

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN button to tune from low to high

frequencies and stops at each broadcasting

station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again

during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN

tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that

station.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

to Station memory operations:

12 stations can be set for the FM band (6 each

for FM1 and FM2), 18 for XM radio (6 each for

XM1, XM2 and XM3) and 6 can be set for the

AM band for easy access.

1. Choose the radio band using the radio band

select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,

SCAN or TUNE button.

3. Push and hold the desired radio station

preset button to until a beep sound is

heard. (The radio mutes when the radio

station preset button is pushed.)

4. The station indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

Information Provided by:

Black plate (180,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Radio Data System (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a

data information service transmitted by some

radio stations on the FM band (not AM band)

encoded within a regular radio broadcast.

Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities,

but many stations are now considering broad-

casting RDS data.

RDS can display:

.Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

.Station name, such as “The Groove”.

.Music or programming type such as “Clas-

sical”, “Country” or “Rock”.

.Traffic reports about delays or construction.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the

RDS icon is displayed.

RADIO DISPLAY change:

When the RADIO DISPLAY change button is

pushed during the FM or SAT radio mode, the

radio display will change in the following order.

.For FM radio:

Frequency ↔PS (Programme Service)/PTY

(Programme type)

.For XM Satellite Radio:

Category Name ?Channel Name ?Artist/

Feature ?Song/Program

In the FM radio mode, pushing the DISP button

will switch the frequency display to the PTY

display (if available), and if the DISP button is

not pushed again within 5 seconds, it will

automatically switch to the PS display. If PTY

is not available, pushing the DISP button will

only switch between the frequency display and

the PS display.

SAA3490

Compact Disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, and insert the CD into the slot with the

label side facing up. The CD will be guided

automatically into the slot and start playing.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on

the disc will appear on the display.

If the radio is already operating, it will auto-

matically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off while the CD

was playing, pushing the PWR button will start

the CD.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

4-36 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (181,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

CD PLAY:

When the CD button is pushed with the system

off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on

and the CD will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the CD

loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the CD will start

to play.

CD play information:

When the DISP button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the

disc information display will change as follows:

CD:

CD with MP3 or WMA:

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-

wind):

CD:

When the (fast forward) or (rewind)

button is pushed while the CD is being played,

the CD will play while fast forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released, the

CD will return to normal play speed.

CD with MP3 or WMA:

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,

the folders in the CD will change.

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

played, the CD will play while forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released, the CD

will return to the normal play speed.

APS (Automatic Program

Search) FF, APS REW:

When the (APS FF) button is pushed while

the CD is being played, the program next to the

present one will start to play from its beginning.

Push several times to skip through programs.

The CD will advance the number of times the

button is pushed. (When the last program on the

CD is skipped through, the first program will be

played.)

When the (APS REW) button is pushed,

the program being played returns to its begin-

ning. Push several times to skip back through

programs. The CD will go back the number of

times the button is pushed.

SCAN tuning:

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

played, the beginning of all the tracks of CD will

be played for 10 seconds in sequence.

Pushing the button again during this 10 second

period will stop SCAN tuning.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within

10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

disc program.

RANDOM (RDM)/REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

CD:

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37

Information Provided by:

Black plate (182,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

CD with MP3 or WMA:

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

When this button is pushed while the CD is

being played, the CD will come out and the

system will turn off.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect

it.

SAA3442

Interface system for iPod®operation

Connecting iPod®:

The iPod®outlet connector is in the glove box.

Connect the cable *

1as illustrated, and then

connect the other end of the cable to your iPod®

2. Your vehicle is equipped with the specia-

lized cable for connecting the iPod®to your

vehicle audio unit. The battery of your iPod®is

charged while it is connected to the vehicle if the

iPod®supports charging via a FireWire®con-

nection.

When the connection is complete, a NISSAN

logo will be displayed on the iPod®and an iPod®

icon on the audio display illuminates. While

connecting the iPod®to the vehicle, the iPod®

can only be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet,

fully depress the center connector button to

unlatch the connector and pull the connector

straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the

cable from the iPod®, fully depress the side

connector buttons and pull the iPod®connector

straight out of the iPod®.

*iPod

®, iPhone®and FireWire®are a trademark

of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

Compatibility:

The following models are available:

.Third generation iPod®(Firmware version

2.3 or later) (Audiobook and Podcast are not

available)

.Fourth generation iPod®(Firmware version

3.1.1 or later)

.Fifth generation iPod®(Firmware version

1.1.2 or later)

.iPod mini®(Firmware version 1.41 or later)

.iPod photo®(Firmware version 1.2.1 or later)

.iPod nano®(Firmware version 1.2 or later)

The fourth generation iPod nano®, iPod touch®,

the second generation iPod Classic®and

4-38 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (183,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

iPhone®3G may not work with the system in

some cases.

Make sure that your iPod®firmware is updated.

* 12V-charge iPod®s are not chargeable with

this system.

iPod®button:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Then, push the iPod®button to switch

to the iPod®mode.

If another audio source is playing and the iPod®

is connected, pushing the iPod®button changes

to the iPod®mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®

was playing, pushing the PWR button will start

the iPod®.

Top menu item selecting:

When the iPod®MENU button is pushed while

the iPod®is connected, the interface for iPod®

operation is shown on the audio display. The

items on the menu list can be scrolled by

pushing the SEEK button or and the

TUNE button or while the iPod®is

operational. To select an item, push ENTER. The

display can be changed as follows:

For more information about each item, see the

iPod®Owner’s Manual.

BACK, ENTER button:

.When the ENTER button is pushed while

the top menu is displayed, program details

are shown on the audio display.

.To select the program, push to search using

the SEEK or and ENTER button.

.When the BACK button is pushed, it returns

to the previous display.

iPod®play information:

When the DISP button is pushed while a

program is being played, the program informa-

tion display will change as follows:

* Artist Name will not be displayed for a Podcast.

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-

wind) button:

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod®is

playing, the iPod®will play while fast forwarding

or rewinding. When the button is released, the

iPod®will return to the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the iPod®is playing, the

next track or the beginning of the current track

on the iPod®will be played.

APS (Automatic Program

Search) FF, APS REW button:

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod®is

playing, numbers of tracks can be skipped

through.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while iPod®is playing, the next

track or the beginning of the current track on the

iPod®will be played.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When the RPT button is pushed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (184,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Except Podcast and Audiobook:

Podcast:

ALL REPEAT ↔TRACK REPEAT

Audiobook:

AUX (Auxiliary) input

AUX IN jack:

The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from a

portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or

laptop computer.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

With an AUX device plugged in, push the AUX

button repeatedly until the display changes to

the AUX mode.

When the AUX button is pushed with no device

plugged into the jack, the audio system does not

change to the AUX mode.

SAA3425

1. XM band select button

2. CD insert slot

3. CD EJECT button

4. TUNE/SCROLL and AUDIO control knob

5. Radio station preset buttons

6. AUX button

7. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob

8. FF (forward)/REW (rewind) or SEEK/CATEGORY

button

9. CD button

10. FM·AM band select button

No satellite radio reception is available unless an

XM Satellite Radio subscription is active.

4-40 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (185,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B)

For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO

OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this

section.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is

not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

It may take some time to receive the activation

signal after subscribing the XM Satellite Radio.

After receiving the activation signal, an available

channel list will be automatically updated in the

radio. For XM, place the ignition switch in LOCK

to ACC to update the channel list.

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically in both

radio reception and CD playback.

ON·OFF/Volume control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, and then push the ON·OFF button

while the system is off to turn on the last audio

source (i.e. FM or CD), which was playing

immediately before the system was turned off.

While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF

button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-

ance:

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push

the Audio control knob. When the display shows

the setting you want to change (Bass, Treble,

Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio control

knob to set the desired setting. For the other

setting methods, see “HOW TO USE TOUCH

SCREEN” earlier in this section.

This vehicle has some sound effect functions as

follows:

.Speed Volume

For more details, see “HOW TO USE THE

SETUP BUTTON” earlier in this section.

Adjusting AUX level:

The volume level of incoming sound can be

selected from “Quiet”, “Medium” and “Loud”

when an auxiliary device is connected to the

system. For more details, see “HOW TO USE

THE SETUP BUTTON” earlier in this section.

Switching the display:

Pushing the AUX button will switch the displays

between USB/iPod®and AUX.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

When the radio band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the channel

last played.

The last channel played will also come on when

the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.

If another audio source is playing when the radio

band select button is turned to ON, the audio

source will automatically be turned off and the

last radio channel played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

FM·AM radio band select:

Pushing the FM·AM radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

AM ?FM1 ?FM2 ?AM

XM radio band select:

Pushing the XM radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

XM1 ?XM2 ?XM3 ?XM1

The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41

Information Provided by:

Black plate (186,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

TUNE (Tuning):

.For AM and FM radio

Turn the TUNE knob for manual tuning.

.For XM Satellite Radio

Turn the TUNE knob to seek channels from

all of the categories when any category is

not selected.

SEEK tuning:

.For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK/CATEGORY button or

to tune from low to high or high to low

frequencies and to stop at the next broad-

casting station.

.For XM Satellite Radio

Push the SEEK/CATEGORY button or

to tune to the first channel of the next

or previous category.

Tuning with the touchscreen (AM and FM

radio):

When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be

tuned using the touchscreen. To bring up the

visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower

right corner of the screen. A screen appears

with a bar running from low frequencies on the

left to high frequencies on the right. Touch the

screen at the location of the frequency you wish

to tune and the station will change to that

frequency. To return to the regular radio display

screen, touch the “OK” key.

to Station memory operations:

12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band

(6 each for FM1 and FM2), 18 for XM radio (6

each for XM1, XM2 and XM3) and 6 stations

can be set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band using the radio band

select button.

2. Tune to the desired station/channel using

the SEEK/CATEGORY button or the TUNE

knob.

3. Push and hold the desired station preset

button to until the beep sound is

heard.

4. The station indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations/channels.

Touchscreen (XM Satellite Radio):

When the XM Satellite Radio is being played,

the following items are available with the

touchscreen operation.

.Channels

Displays a list of channels. Touch a preferred

channel displayed on the list to change to

that channel.

.Categories

Displays a list of categories. Touch a

preferred channel displayed on the list to

display options within that category.

Compact Disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into

the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will

be guided automatically into the slot and start

playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will auto-

matically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off while the CD

was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will

start the CD.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

4-42 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (187,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

PLAY:

When the CD button is pushed with the system

off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on

and the CD will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the CD

loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the CD will start

to play.

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD,

certain text may be displayed (when a CD

encoded with text is being used). Depending on

how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the

text is displayed listing the artist, album and

song title.

Next/Previous Track and Fast

Forward/Rewind:

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

played, the CD will play while fast forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released, the CD

will return to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,

the next track or the beginning of the current

track on the CD will be played.

When the rewind button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current

track starts playing, the previous track will be

played.

SAA3401

Random:

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play

pattern to the CD. When the random mode is

active, the icon will be displayed to the left

of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing,

touching “Random” alternates between ran-

domly playing songs within the current folder

and songs from the CD as a whole. The

icon is displayed to the left of the song title or

folder name to denote which pattern is applied.

To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random”

key until no icon is displayed.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43

Information Provided by:

Black plate (188,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA3402

Repeat:

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the CD. When the repeat mode is

active, the icon will be displayed to the left

of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing,

touching “Repeat” alternates between repeating

the current song and repeating the current

folder. The icon is displayed to the left of

the song title or folder name to denote which

pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat mode,

touch the “Repeat” key until no icon is

displayed.

Browse:

Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on

the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in

the list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD

is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also

list the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure

for selecting a song with the touchscreen to

choose a folder.

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

When this button is pushed while the CD is

being played, the CD will be ejected.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect

it.

AUX (Auxiliary) input

AUX IN jack:

The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from a

portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or

laptop computer.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

To switch to the AUX mode, push the AUX

button when a compatible audio device is

connected into the AUX IN jack.

When the AUX button is pushed with no device

plugged into the jack, the audio system does not

change to the AUX mode.

4-44 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (189,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA3444

USB memory operation

Audio main operation:

The USB outlet connector is on the lower center

of the instrument panel. Open the lid and

connect a USB memory as illustrated. Then,

switch to the USB memory mode automatically.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL

control knob will start the USB memory.

PLAY:

When the AUX button is pushed with the system

off and the USB memory inserted, the system

will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a USB

memory is inserted, push the AUX button

repeatedly until the center display changes to

the USB memory mode.

SEEK/CATEGORY button:

Push the SEEK/CATEGORY button while

an audio file on the USB device is playing to

return to the beginning of the current track. Push

the SEEK/CATEGORY button several

times to skip backward several tracks.

Push the SEEK/CATEGORY button while

an audio file on the USB device is playing to

advance one track. Push the SEEK/CATEGORY

button several times to skip forward several

tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB

device is skipped, the first track of the next folder

is played.

Push and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY button

or for 1.5 seconds while an audio file

on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast

forward the track being played. The track plays

at an increased speed while reversing or fast

forwarding. When the button is released, the

audio file returns to normal play speed.

SAA3491

Random and repeat play mode:

While files on a USB device are playing, the play

pattern can be altered so that songs are

repeated or played randomly.

Random:

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play

pattern to the USB device. When the random

mode is active, the icon is displayed to the

left of the song title or album name to denote

which random pattern is applied. To cancel

Random mode, touch the “Random” key until no

icon is displayed.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45

Information Provided by:

Black plate (190,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Repeat:

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the USB device. When the repeat

mode is active, the icon is displayed to the

left of the song title or album name to denote

which repeat pattern is applied. To cancel

Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no

icon is displayed.

SAA3445

iPod®PLAYER OPERATION

Connecting iPod®

Open the tray lid and connect the iPod®cable to

the USB connector. If the iPod®supports

charging via USB, the battery of the iPod®will

be charged while connected to the vehicle.

Depending on the version of the iPod®, the

display on the iPod®shows a NISSAN or

Accessory Attached screen when the connec-

tion is completed. When the iPod®is connected

to the vehicle, the iPod®music library can only

be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

*iPod

®is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are available:

.Fifth generation iPod®(version 1.2.3 or later)

.iPod Classic®(version 1.1.1 or later)

.First generation iPod touch®(version 2.0.0

or later)

.Second generation iPod touch®(version

1.2.3 or later)

.First generation iPod nano®(version 1.3.1 or

later)

.Second generation iPod nano®(version

1.1.3 or later)

.Third generation iPod nano®(version 1.1 or

later)

.Fourth generation iPod nano®(version 1.0.2

or later)

This unit may not control/operate correctly when

connected to some iPod versions/firmware and

iPhone.

Make sure that the iPod®version is updated.

Audio main operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Then, push the button repeatedly

to switch to the iPod®mode.

4-46 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (191,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®

was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will

start the iPod®.

PLAY:

When the button is pushed with the

system off and the iPod®connected, the system

will turn on. If another audio source is playing

and the iPod®is connected, push the

button repeatedly to switch to the iPod®mode.

Interface:

The interface for iPod®operation shown on the

vehicle center display is similar to the iPod®

interface. Use the touchscreen, BACK button

or the TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the

menus on the screen.

The following items can be chosen from the

menu list screen. For further information about

each item, see the iPod®Owner’s Manual.

.Playlists

.Artists

.Songs

.Composers

.Audiobooks

.Podcasts

The following touch-panel buttons shown on the

screen are also available:

.: returns to the previous screen.

.: plays/pauses the music selected.

SEEK/CATEGORY button:

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod®is

playing, the iPod®will play while fast forwarding

or rewinding. When the button is released, the

iPod®will return to the normal play speed.

SAA3492

Random and repeat play mode:

While files on a USB device are playing, the play

pattern can be altered so that songs are

repeated or played randomly.

Random:

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play

pattern to the iPod. When the random mode is

active, the icon is displayed to the left of

the song title or album name to denote which

random pattern is applied. To cancel Random

mode, touch the “Random” key until no

icon is displayed.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47

Information Provided by:

Black plate (192,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Repeat:

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the iPod. When the repeat mode is

active, the icon is displayed to the left of

the song title or album name to denote which

repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat

mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no icon

is displayed.

SAA0451

CD/USB MEMORY CARE AND

CLEANING

.Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the

surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

.Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

.To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

.A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

USB memory

.Never touch the terminal portion of the USB

memory.

.Do not place heavy objects on the USB

memory.

.Do not store the USB memory in very humid

locations.

.Do not expose the USB memory to direct

sunlight.

.Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory.

Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual for

the details.

4-48 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (193,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA3383

1. SOURCE select switch

2. Tuning switch

3. VOLUME control switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

SOURCE select switch

With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or

ON position, push the SOURCE select switch

to turn the audio system on.

Push the SOURCE select switch to change the

mode.

AM, FM, CD, AUX, USB (if so equipped)/iPod®

and SAT (if so equipped)

If no CD is loaded or AUX and/or iPod®are not

connected, the CD, AUX and/or iPod®modes

will be skipped.

VOLUME control switch

Push up or down the VOLUME control switch to

increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5 seconds

to change the next or previous radio preset.

SEEK tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5

seconds to seek the next or previous radio

station.

APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS

REW (CD and iPod®):

Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5 seconds

to return to the beginning of the present

program or skip to the next program. Push

several times to skip back or skip through

programs.

This system searches for the blank intervals

between selections. If there is a blank interval

within one program or there is no interval

between programs, the system may not stop in

the desired or expected location.

FOLDER change (CD with MP3 or WMA):

Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5

seconds to change the folders (if there are any

folders).

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49

Information Provided by:

Black plate (194,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

ANTENNA

CAUTION

.To avoid damaging or deforming the

antenna, be sure to fold down (if so

equipped) or remove the antenna

under the following conditions.

— The vehicle enters a garage with

a low ceiling.

— The vehicle is covered with a car

cover.

.Be sure that antenna is removed

before the vehicle enters an auto-

matic car wash.

.Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation. Otherwise,

the antenna rod may break during

vehicle operation.

SAA1236

For FM-AM radio

.Adjust the angle of the antenna for the best

reception.

.To remove the antenna, hold the bottom of

the antenna and turn it counterclockwise.

.To install the antenna, turn the antenna

clockwise and tighten.

4-50 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (195,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA2102

For FM-AM-SAT radio

.To remove the antenna, hold the bottom of

the antenna and turn it counterclockwise.

.To install the antenna, turn the antenna

clockwise and tighten.

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in

your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following

precautions, otherwise the new equipment may

adversely affect the electronic control modules

and electronic control system harness.

WARNING

.A cellular telephone should not be

used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use

of cellular telephones while driving.

.If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands-free

cellular phone operational mode (if

so equipped) is highly recom-

mended. Exercise extreme caution

at all times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

.If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

.Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic control

modules.

.Keep the antenna wire more than 8

in (20 cm) away from the electronic

control system harness. Do not

route the antenna wire next to any

harness.

.Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the man-

ufacturer.

.Connect the ground wire from the

CB radio chassis to the body.

.For details, consult a NISSAN deal-

er.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51

Information Provided by:

Black plate (196,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

.Use a phone after stopping your

vehicle in a safe location. If you

have to use a phone while driving,

exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation.

.If you find yourself unable to devote

full attention to vehicle operation

while talking on the phone, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

SAA3446

1. Volume control switch −/+

2. PHONE SEND button

3. PHONE END button

4. Microphone

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a

compatible Bluetooth®enabled cellular phone,

you can set up the wireless connection between

your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module. With Bluetooth®wireless technology,

you can make or receive a hands-free telephone

call in your vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-

vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-

ing procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phonemodulewhentheignitionswitchis

placed in the ON position with the connected

cellular phone turned on and carried in the

vehicle.

You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®

cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

.Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

.Some Bluetooth®enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.

com/bluetooth for a recommended phone

list and instructions for connecting your

phone.

.You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone

service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such as in

a tunnel, in an underground parking

BLUETOOTH®HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM

4-52 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (197,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

garage, near a tall building or in a

mountainous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

.When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice

during a call.

.Immediatelyaftertheignitionswitchis

placed in the ON position, it may be

impossible to receive a call for a short

period of time.

.Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection dis-

ruption.

.While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth®wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may

discharge quicker than usual. The Blue-

tooth®Hands-Free Phone System cannot

charge cellular phones.

.If the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System

seems to be malfunctioning, see “Trouble-

shooting guide” later in this section. You can

also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for

troubleshooting help.

.Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

.Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding battery charging, cellular phone

antenna, etc.

This wireless hands-free car kit is based on

Bluetooth technology.

* Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz

* Output power: 4.14 dBm E.I.R.P

* Modulation: FHSS GFSK 8DPSK, p/

4DQPSK

* Number of channels: 79

* This wireless equipment cannot be used for

any services related to life safety because

there is the possibility of radio interference.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

Bluetooth trademark:

Bluetooth®is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.

and licensed to Visteon Corpora-

tion.

FCC Regulatory information

— CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1) this device may not cause interference and

2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device

IC Regulatory information

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

— This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the Bluetooth®Hands-

Free Phone System.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53

Information Provided by:

Black plate (198,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-

lized, which takes a few seconds. If the

button is pushed before the initialization com-

pletes, the system will not accept any command.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-

ing:

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

.Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

.Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

.Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice command

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push

and release the button located on the

steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a

command.

Thecommandgivenispickedupbythe

microphone, and voice feedback is given when

the command is accepted.

.If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

.If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please say again.” Repeat the command in

a clear voice.

.If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or

“Correction” anytime the system is waiting

for a response.

.You can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can

also push and hold the button for 5

seconds on the steering wheel at any time to

cancel the VR session. Whenever the VR

session is cancelled, a double beep is

played to indicate you have exited the

system.

.If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, push the volume control switch (+

or −) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use

the radio volume control knob.

.In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pushing the button on the steering

wheel.

.To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example,

push the button and after the tone say,

“Call Redial.” Note: The combined com-

mand of Call and (a Name) cannot be used.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands.

Refer to the rules and examples below.

.Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

— “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh

oh”, or

— “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”

.Words can be used for the first 4 digits

places only.

4-54 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (199,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Example: 1-800-662-6200

— “One eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”,

— NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty

two hundred, and

— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two

hundred.

.Numbers can be spoken in small groups.

The system will prompt you to continuing

entering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

— “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

— “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

— “six two zero zero”

.You can say “Star” for “*” and “Pound” for

“#” at any time in any position of the phone

number. (Available only when using the

“Special Dialing” command.)

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

— “One five five five one two one two star

one two three”

.Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*”

(available when using the “Special Dialing”

command and the “Send” command during

a call).

.Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using

the “Special Dialing” command).

.Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (available

only when storing a phone book number).

See “Making a call by entering a phone

number” later in this section and “LIST OF

VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section

for more information.

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as

single digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at any

time. Please say the “Help” command to get

information about how to use the system.

INFO

.If you are controlling the telephone system

by voice command for the first time or do not

know the appropriate voice command,

speak “Help”. The system announces the

available commands.

.When you speak numbers, you can speak

both “zero” or “oh” for “0”.

Manual command selection

Commands can be selected manually. While the

commands are displayed on the audio screen,

select a command by operating the audio tuning

switch, and then push the switch. Once a

command is manually selected, the voice

command function is cancelled. To return to

voice command mode, push the switch to

cancel the current operation, and then perform

the first procedure of voice command.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55

Information Provided by:

Black plate (200,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SAA3385

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth®Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

PHONE SEND

Push the button to initiate a VR session or

answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button to interrupt

system feedback and give a command at once.

PHONE END

While the voice recognition system is active,

push the button to go back one step. Push

and hold the button for 5 seconds to quit

the voice recognition system at any time.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you get

started using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone

System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For

additional command options, refer to “LIST OF

VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth®Hands-Free

Phone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Push and hold the button for more than

5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Push the PHONE

SEND ( ) button for the hands-free

phone system to enter the speaker adapta-

tion mode or push the PHONE END ( )

button to select a different language.”

3. Push the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see

“SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE”

later in this section.

4. The system announces the current language

and gives you the option to change the

language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French

(in French). Use the following chart to select

the language.

NOTE:

You must push the button or the

button within 5 seconds to change

the language.

Current lan-

guage

Push

(TALK/PHONE

SEND) to select

Push

(MODE/

PHONE END)

to select

English Spanish French

Spanish English French

French English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the language, do

not push either button. After 5 seconds, the

VR session will end, and the language will

not be changed.

Connecting procedure

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be cancelled.

4-56 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (201,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

1. Push the button on the steering wheel.

The system announces the available com-

mands.

2. Say: “Connect Phone” *

A. The system

acknowledges the command and an-

nounces the next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Add phone” *

B. The system acknowl-

edges the command and asks you to initiate

pairing from the phone handset *

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit www.

nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on

connecting NISSAN recommended cellular

phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter

“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code

“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and

cannot be changed.

4. The system asks you to say a name for the

phone *

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells you, then prompts you for a

name again.

Also, if more than one phone is connected

and the name sounds too much like a name

already used, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

Making a call by entering a phone

number

1. Push the button on steering wheel. A

tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” *

A. The system acknowledges

the command and announces the next set of

available commands.

3. Say: “Phone Number” *

B. The system

acknowledges the command and an-

nounces the next set of available commands.

Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10

digits or any special characters.

4. Say the number you wish to call starting with

the area code in single digit format. If the

system has trouble recognizing the correct

phone number, try entering the number in

the following groups: 3-digit area code, 3-

digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example,

555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five”

as the 1st group, then “one two one” as the

2nd group, and “three three five four” as the

3rd group. For dialing more than 10 digits or

any special characters, say “Special Dial-

ing”. See “How to say numbers” earlier in

this section, for more information.

5. When you have finished speaking the phone

number, the system repeats it back and

announces the available commands.

6. Say: “Dial” *

C. The system acknowledges

the command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “LIST OF

VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, push the

button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, push the button

on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you

hear the ring tone, push the button on

the steering wheel to reject the call.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57

Information Provided by:

Black plate (202,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

When you push and release the button on

the steering wheel, you can choose from the

commands on the Main Menu. The following

pages describe these commands and the

commands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before

speaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands

currently available anytime the system is waiting

for a response.

A menu item can also be selected by scrolling

the display with the SEEK switch and entering

by pushing the button.

If you want to end an action without completing

it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at anytime the

system is waiting for a response. The system will

end the VR session. Whenever the VR session

is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate

you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,

you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime

the system is waiting for a response.

Call

Name (speak name) *

If there are entries stored in the phonebook, a

number associated with a name and location

can be dialed.

See “Phonebook (phones without automatic

phonebook download function)” later in this

section to learn how to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name of

the phonebook entry to call. The system

acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with

the name, the system asks the user to choose

the location.

Once the name and location are confirmed, the

system begins the call.

Phone Number (speak digits) *

When prompted by the system, say the number

to call. Refer to “Making a call by entering a

phone number” earlier in this section for more

details.

“Redial” *

Use the Redial command to call the last number

that was dialed.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to redial” and

ends the VR session.

“Call back” *

Use the Call Back command to dial the number

of the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to call back”

and ends the VR session.

Special Dialing

To dial more than 10 digits or any special

characters, please say “Special Dialing”. When

the system acknowledges the command, the

system will prompt you to speak the number.

4-58 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (203,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

During a call

During a call there are several command options

available. Push the button on the steering

wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter

commands.

.“Help” — The system announces the avail-

able commands.

.“Go back/Correction” — The system an-

nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session

and returns to the call.

.“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces

“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns

to the call.

.“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send

command to enter numbers, “*” or “#”

during a call. For example, if you were

directed to dial an extension by an auto-

mated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the command

and sends the tones associated with the

numbers. The system then ends the VR

session and returns to the call. Say “star” for

“*”, say “pound” for “#”.

.“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call

command to transfer the call from the

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System to

the cellular phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call

transferred to privacy mode.” The system

then ends the VR session.

To reconnect a call from the cellular phone

to the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone sys-

tem, push the button.

.“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute

your voice so the other party cannot hear it.

Use the mute command again to unmute

your voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phone

network connection is lost while the Mute

feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset

to “off” for the next call so the other party

can hear your voice.

Phonebook (phones without automatic

phonebook download function)

“Transfer Entry” *

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new

name in the system.

Say: “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges

the command and asks you to initiate the

transfer from the phone handset. The new

contact phone number will be transferred from

the cellular phone via the Bluetooth®commu-

nication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit www.

nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on

transferring phone numbers from NISSAN re-

commended cellular phones.

The system confirms the name, location and

number.

“Delete Entry” *

Use the Delete Entry command to delete one

entry from the phonebook. After the system

acknowledges a command, say the name to

delete or say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“List Names” *

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names in the phonebook. The system recites the

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-59

Information Provided by:

Black plate (204,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

phonebook entries but does not include the

actual phone numbers. When playback of the

list is complete, the system returns to the main

menu.

Playback of the list can be stopped at any time

by pushing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session.

Phonebook (phones with automatic

phonebook download function)

NOTE:

Phonebook commands are not available

when the vehicle is moving.

For phones that support automatic download of

the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth®profile), the

“Phonebook” command is used to manage

entries to the vehicle phonebook. You can say

the name of an entry at this menu to initiate

dialing of that entry.

The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for

each phone paired with the system. Each name

can have up to 4 locations/phone numbers

associated with it.

When a phone is connected to the system, the

phonebook is automatically downloaded to the

vehicle. This feature allows you to access your

phonebook from the Bluetooth system and call

contacts by name. You can record a custom

voice tag for contact names that the system has

difficulty recognizing. For more information see

“Record Name” in this section.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“List names” *

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete, the

system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pushing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the

“Record Name” command in this section for

information about recording custom voice tags

for list entries that the system has difficulty

pronouncing.

“Record name” *

The system allows you to record custom voice

tags for contact names in the phonebook that

the vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This

feature can also be used to record voice tags

to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers.

Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the

system.

Recent Calls

Use the Recent Calls command to access

outgoing, incoming or missed calls.

“Outgoing” *

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing

calls made from the vehicle.

“Incoming” *

Use the Incoming command to list the incoming

calls made from the vehicle.

4-60 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (205,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

“Missed” *

Use the Missed command to list the missed

calls made to the vehicle that were not

answered.

Connect Phone

NOTE:

Add Phone command is not available

when the vehicle is moving.

Use the Connect Phone commands to manage

the phones connecting to the vehicle or to

enable the Bluetooth®function on the vehicle.

“Add Phone” *

Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to

the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” earlier

in this section for more information.

“Select Phone” *

Use the Select Phone command to select from a

list of phones connected to the vehicle. The

system will list the names assigned to each

phone and then prompt you for the phone you

wish to select. Only one phone can be active at

a time.

“Delete Phone” *

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a

phone that is connected to the vehicle. The

system will list the names assigned to each

phone and then prompt you for the phone you

wish to delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle

will also delete that phonebook for that phone.

“Turn Bluetooth Off” *

Use the Bluetooth Off command to prevent a

wireless connection to your phone.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of

dialect users to train the system to improve

recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of

commands, the users can create a voice model

of their own voice that is stored in the system.

The system is capable of storing a different

speaker adaptation model for each connected

phone.

Training procedure

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet

outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine

running, the parking brake on, and the

transmission in Park.

3. Push and hold the button for more than

5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Push the PHONE

SEND ( ) button for the hands-free

phone system to enter the speaker adapta-

tion mode or push the PHONE END ( )

button to select a different language.”

5. Push the button.

For information on selecting a different

language, see “Choosing a language” earlier

in this section.

6. If the connected phone is already in use, the

system will prompt you to overwrite. Follow

the instructions provided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are

ready to begin, push the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the

instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell

you an adequate number of phrases have

been recorded.

10. The system will announce that speaker

adaptation has been completed and the

system is ready.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-61

Information Provided by:

Black plate (206,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

The SA mode will stop if:

.The button is pushed for more than 5

seconds in SA mode.

.The vehicle is driven during SA mode.

.The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or

LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs you to

say the following phrases.

(The system will prompt you for each phrase.)

.phonebook new entry

.dial 30429

.delete call back number

.setup pair phone

.memo pad play

.8 pause 9 3 2 pause 7

.delete all entries

.call 7 2409

.phonebook delete entry

.memo pad record

.dial star 2170

.yes

.no

.select ring tone

.Setup change priority

.dial 85692

.Bluetooth on

.Home

.call 3 1902

.9 7 pause pause 3 0 8

.cancel

.call back number

.call star 2095

.delete phone

.dial 83051

.setup change ring tone

.4 3 pause 2 9 pause 0

.delete redial number

.phonebook list names

.call 8 0541

.correction

.setup main menu

.dial 74018

.memo pad delete

.delete

.dial 97266

.call 7 6301

4-62 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (207,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.go back

.call 5 6280

.dial 66437

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-63

Information Provided by:

Black plate (208,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command

correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. (See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section.)

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).

NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the

recognition response for the speaker. (See “SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE” earlier in this section.)

The system consistently selects the

wrong entry from the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the

“List Names” command. (See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section.)

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-64 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (209,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

MEMO

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-65

Information Provided by:

Black plate (16,1)

5 Starting and driving

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Precautions when starting and driving ..................... 5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-2

Three-way catalyst.......................................... 5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover ........................... 5-5

Off-road recovery........................................... 5-5

Rapid air pressure loss.................................... 5-6

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving...................... 5-7

Driving safety precautions ................................ 5-7

Ignition switch

(models without Intelligent Key system) ................... 5-9

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ............ 5-9

Manual Transmission (MT) .............................. 5-10

Key positions .............................................. 5-10

Push-button ignition switch

(models with Intelligent Key system) ..................... 5-11

Operating range for engine start function........... 5-11

Push-button ignition switch operation................ 5-12

Push-button ignition switch positions ................ 5-12

Intelligent Key battery discharge ...................... 5-13

Before starting the engine .................................. 5-14

Starting the engine ........................................... 5-14

Models without Intelligent Key system ............... 5-14

Models with Intelligent Key system ................... 5-15

Driving the vehicle ............................................ 5-16

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) .......... 5-16

Manual Transmission (MT) .............................. 5-20

Integrated control system (if so equipped).............. 5-22

Drive mode................................................. 5-22

Parking brake .................................................. 5-26

Cruise control ................................................. 5-26

Precautions on cruise control .......................... 5-26

Cruise control operations ............................... 5-27

Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-28

Increasing fuel economy .................................... 5-29

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ................ 5-29

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) mode switch

operations .................................................. 5-30

AWD warning light ....................................... 5-32

Parking/parking on hills...................................... 5-33

Electric power steering system ............................ 5-34

Brake system .................................................. 5-35

Braking precautions ...................................... 5-35

Brake assist.................................................... 5-36

Brake assist................................................ 5-36

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...................... 5-36

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ................. 5-37

Cold weather driving......................................... 5-39

Freeing a frozen door lock.............................. 5-39

Anti-freeze.................................................. 5-39

Battery ...................................................... 5-39

Draining of coolant water ............................... 5-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (17,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Tire equipment ............................................ 5-39

Special winter equipment ............................... 5-40

Driving on snow or ice .................................. 5-40

Engine block heater (if so equipped)................. 5-40

Information Provided by:

Black plate (212,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

.Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. They

could accidentally injure themselves

or others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

.Properly secure all cargo with ropes

or straps to help prevent it from

sliding or shifting. Do not place

cargo higher than the seatbacks. In

a sudden stop or collision, unse-

cured cargo could cause personal

injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

.Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless car-

bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is

dangerous. It can cause uncon-

sciousness or death.

.If you suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering the vehicle, drive with

all windows fully open, and have the

vehicle inspected immediately.

.Do not run the engine in closed

spaces such as a garage.

.Do not park the vehicle with the

engine running for any extended

length of time.

.Keep the lift gate closed while

driving, otherwise exhaust gases

could be drawn into the passenger

compartment. If you must drive with

the lift gate open, follow these

precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation to off

and the fan control to high to

circulate the air.

.If electrical wiring or other cable

connections must pass to a trailer

through the seal on the lift gate or

the body, follow the manufacturer’s

recommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle.

.If a special body, camper or other

equipment is added for recreational

or other usage, follow the manufac-

turer’s recommendation to prevent

carbon monoxide entry into the

vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle

appliances such as stoves, refrig-

erators, heaters, etc. may also gen-

erate carbon monoxide.)

.The exhaust system and body

should be inspected by a qualified

mechanic whenever:

— The vehicle is raised for service.

— You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

— You notice a change in the

sound of the exhaust system.

— You have had an accident invol-

ving damage to the exhaust

system, underbody, or rear of

the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (213,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

.The exhaust gas and the exhaust

system are very hot. Keep people,

animals or flammable materials

away from the exhaust system com-

ponents.

.Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

.Do not use leaded gasoline. Depos-

its from leaded gasoline will ser-

iously reduce the three-way

catalyst’s ability to help reduce ex-

haust pollutants.

.Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-

functions in the ignition, fuel injec-

tion, or electrical systems can cause

overrich fuel flow into the three-way

catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do

not keep driving if the engine mis-

fires, or if noticeable loss of perfor-

mance or other unusual operating

conditions are detected. Have the

vehicle inspected promptly by a

NISSAN dealer.

.Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, dama-

ging the three-way catalyst.

.Do not race the engine while warm-

ing it up.

.Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label, you should determine the proper

tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or more of your tires

is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check all 4 tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS

malfunction indicator is combined with the low

tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-

cator is illuminated, the system may not be able

to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of replace-

ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle

that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale

after replacing one or more tires or wheels on

your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

Starting and driving 5-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (214,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 29

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continue to function properly.

Additional information

.The TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

.The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect

a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a

flat tire while driving).

.The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)

to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

.Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in

low ambient temperature, check the tire

pressure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MON-

ITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section.

WARNING

.If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull

off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble. Driving with under-inflated tires

may permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in serious

personal injury. Check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD

tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as possi-

ble. (See “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In

case of emergency” section for

changing a flat tire.)

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will

remain on after 1 minute. Contact

your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/

or system resetting.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors.

5-4 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (215,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

CAUTION

.The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

tire chains or the wheels are buried

in snow.

.Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the

windows. This may cause poor re-

ception of the signals from the tire

pressure sensors, and the TPMS will

not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. Some examples are:

.Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

.If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

.If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/

AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-

OVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering

maneuvers, because these driving practices

could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, a loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,

particularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all

times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive

when under the influence of alcohol or drugs

(including prescription or over-the-counter

drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always

wear your seat belt as outlined in the “SEAT

BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of this

manual, and also instruct your passengers to do

so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

If the right side or left side wheels leave the road

surface, maintain control of the vehicle by

Starting and driving 5-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (216,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

following the procedure below. Please note that

this procedure is only a general guide. The

vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on

the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive

the vehicle back onto the road surface until

vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to the

road surface. When all tires are on the road

surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the

appropriate driving lane.

.If you decide that it is not safe to return

the vehicle to the road surface based on

vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gra-

dually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe

place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due

to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure

loss can also be caused by driving on under-

inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway

speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main-

taining the correct air pressure and visually

inspect the tires for wear and damage. See

“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out”

while driving maintain control of the vehicle by

following the procedure below. Please note that

this procedure is only a general guide. The

vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on

the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air

pressure. Losing control of the vehicle

may cause a collision and result in

personal injury.

.The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

.Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

.Do not rapidly release the accelera-

tor pedal.

.Do not rapidly turn the steering

wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location

off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually

stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

either contact a roadside emergency service

to change the tire or see “CHANGING A

FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section of this Owner’s Manual.

5-6 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (217,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-

stream reduces coordination, delays

reaction time and impairs judgement.

Driving after drinking alcohol increases

the likelihood of being involved in an

accident injuring yourself and others.

Additionally, if you are injured in an

accident, alcohol can increase the se-

verity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents.

Although the local laws vary on what is

considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is

that alcohol affects all people differently and

most people underestimate the effects of

alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,

prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by

alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and

off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep

water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly

designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional

off-road vehicle.

Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod-

els are less capable than All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) models for rough road driving and

extrication when stuck in deep snow, mud, or

the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

.Drive carefully when off the road

and avoid dangerous areas. Every

person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should be seated with their

seat belt fastened. This will keep

you and your passengers in position

when driving over rough terrain.

.Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. Off-road

vehicles can tip over sideways much

more easily than they can forward or

backward.

.Many hills are too steep for any

vehicle. If you drive up them, you

may stall. If you drive down them,

you may not be able to control your

speed. If you drive across them, you

may roll over.

.Do not shift ranges while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

.Stay alert when driving to the top of

a hill. At the top there could be a

drop-off or other hazard that could

cause an accident.

.If your engine stalls or you cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill,

never attempt to turn around. Your

vehicle could tip or roll over. Always

back straight down in R (Reverse)

range. Never back down in N (Neu-

tral), using only the brake, as this

could cause loss of control.

.Heavy braking going down a hill

could cause your brakes to overheat

and fade, resulting in loss of control

and an accident. Apply brakes

lightly and use a low range to

control your speed.

.Unsecured cargo can be thrown

around when driving over rough

Starting and driving 5-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (218,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

terrain. Properly secure all cargo so

it will not be thrown forward and

cause injury to you or your passen-

gers.

.To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated

capacityoftheroofrack(ifso

equipped) and evenly distribute the

load. Secure heavy loads in the

cargo area as far forward and as

low as possible. Do not equip the

vehicle with tires larger than speci-

fied in this manual. This could cause

your vehicle to roll over.

.Do not grip the inside or spokes of

the steering wheel when driving off-

road. The steering wheel could

move suddenly and injure your

hands. Instead drive with your fin-

gers and thumbs on the outside of

the rim.

.Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers

have their seat belts fastened.

.Always drive with the floor mats in

place as the floor may became hot.

.Lower your speed when encounter-

ing strong crosswinds. With a higher

center of gravity, your NISSAN is

more affected by strong side winds.

Slower speeds ensure better vehicle

control.

.Do not drive beyond the perfor-

mance capability of the tires, even

with AWD engaged.

.For AWD equipped vehicles, do not

attempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with

the engine running. Doing so may

result in drivetrain damage or un-

expected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle da-

mage or personal injury.

.Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-

namometer (such as the dynam-

ometers used by some states for

emissions testing), or similar equip-

ment even if the other two wheels

are raised off the ground. Make sure

you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with

AWDbeforeitisplacedona

dynamometer. Using the wrong test

equipment may result in drivetrain

damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

.When a wheel is off the ground due

to an unlevel surface, do not spin

the wheel excessively (AWD model).

.Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

.If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high

speeds. Your vehicle has a higher

center of gravity than a conventional

passenger car. The vehicle is not

designed for cornering at the same

speeds as conventional passenger

cars. Failure to operate this vehicle

correctly could result in loss of

control and/or a rollover accident.

.Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted or radial), and tread pattern

on all four wheels. Install traction

devices on the front wheels when

driving on slippery roads and drive

carefully.

.Be sure to check the brakes imme-

diately after driving in mud or water.

5-8 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (219,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

See “BRAKE SYSTEM” later in this

section for wet brakes.

.Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle

and it rolls forward, backward or

sideways, you could be injured.

.Whenever you drive off-road

through sand, mud or water as deep

as the wheel hub, more frequent

maintenance may be required. See

the maintenance information in the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide”.

.Spinning the front wheels on slip-

pery surfaces may cause the AWD

warning light to flash and the AWD

system to automatically switch from

the AWD mode to the 2WD mode.

This could reduce traction. Be espe-

cially careful when towing a trailer

(AWD model).

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the

LOCK position while driving. This may

cause the driver to lose control of the

vehicle and could result in serious

vehicle damage or personal injury.

SSD0392

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-

MISSION (CVT)

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

.When turning the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, make sure that the selector

lever is in the P (Park) position.

.When removing the key from the ignition

switch, make sure that the selector lever is in

the P (Park) position.

IGNITION SWITCH (models without

Intelligent Key system)

Starting and driving 5-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (220,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

When the ignition switch cannot be turned to

the LOCK position:

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON

direction.

3. TurntheignitionswitchtotheLOCK

position.

4. Remove the key.

If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK

position, the selector lever cannot be moved

from the P (Park) position. The selector lever can

be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON

position with the foot brake pedal depressed.

There is an OFF position *

1between the

LOCK and ACC positions, although it is not

marked on the ignition switch.

SSD0503

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT)

The ignition switch includes a device that helps

prevent accidental removal of the key while

driving.

The key can only be removed when the ignition

switch is in the LOCK position.

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position

from the ACC or ON position, turn the key to the

OFF position, push the key in, then turn the key

to the LOCK position.

There is an OFF position *

1in between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is

indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK (0)

The key can only be removed from the ignition

switch at this position.

OFF (1)

The engine is turned off. The power supply is

turned off.

ACC (2)

The electrical accessory power activates without

the engine turned on.

ON (3)

The ignition system and the electrical accessory

power activate without the engine turned on.

START (4)

The engine starter activates and the engine will

start. The ignition switch, when released, will

automatically turn to the ON position.

CAUTION

As soon as the engine has started,

release the ignition switch immediately.

5-10 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (221,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 2/ 21

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition

switch while driving the vehicle except

in an emergency. (The engine will stop

when the ignition switch is pushed 3

consecutive times or the ignition switch

is pushed and held for more than 2

seconds.) If the engine stops while the

vehicle is being driven, this could lead

to a crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button ignition

switch, be sure to move the selector lever to

the P (Park) position (for Continuously Variable

Transmission models) or the shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position (for manual transmission

models).

SSD0436

OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE

START FUNCTION

The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting

the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range *

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged or strong radio waves are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent Key

system’s operating range becomes narrower

and may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even someone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push

the ignition switch to start the engine.

.The cargo room area is not included in the

operating range but the Intelligent Key may

function.

.If the Intelligent Key is placed on the

instrument panel, inside the glove box or

door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not

function.

.If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door

or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent

Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

(models with Intelligent Key system)

Starting and driving 5-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (222,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 2/ 21

SSD0859

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

OPERATION

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal (Continuously Vari-

able Transmission models) or the clutch pedal

(manual transmission models), the ignition

switch position will change as follows:

.Push once to change to ACC.

.Push two times to change to ON.

.Push three times to change to OFF.

.Push four times to return to ACC.

.Open or close any door to return to LOCK

during the OFF position.

The indicator light *

Aon the ignition switch

illuminates when the ignition switch is in the

ACC or ON position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed on the meter. (See “WARNING/

INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMIN-

DERS” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.)

Continuously Variable Transmission

models

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch position cannot be switched to LOCK

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed

toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

3. Open the door. The ignition switch will

change to the LOCK position.

The selector lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio, when the engine is not

running.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

OFF

The engine can be turned off without locking the

steering wheel.

Continuously Variable Transmission models: The

ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

5-12 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (223,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 2/ 21

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the push-

button ignition switch in ACC or ON

position when the engine is not running

for an extended period. This can dis-

charge the battery.

SSD0860

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-

CHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged,

or environmental conditions interfere with the

Intelligent Key operation, start the engine

according to the following procedure:

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position (for Continuously Variable Trans-

mission models) or the shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position (for manual transmission

models).

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent

Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the

chime sounds. The engine will start.

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition

switch is pushed without depressing the brake

pedal, the ignition switch position will change to

ACC.

NOTE:

.When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC or ON position or the engine is

started by the above procedures, the

Intelligent Key system warning light

may blink in yellow even if the Intelli-

gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is

not a malfunction. To stop the warning

light from blinking, touch the ignition

switch with the Intelligent Key again.

.If the Intelligent Key system warning

light in the meter is blinking in green,

replace the battery as soon as possible.

(See “KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-your-

self” section.)

Starting and driving 5-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (224,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

.Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as

frequently as possible, or at least whenever

you refuel.

.Check that all windows and lights are clean.

.Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

.Lock all doors.

.Position seat and adjust head restraints.

.Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

.Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

.Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position. (See “WARNING/INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in

the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

MODELS WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY

SYSTEM

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed so that it does not

operate unless the selector lever is in either

of the above positions.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position. Depress the clutch pedal fully to

the floor.

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition

switch to START. Release the switch when

the engine starts. If the engine starts, but

fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

.If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when restart-

ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little

(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold

it and then crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal when the engine

starts.

.If the engine is very hard to start

because it is flooded, depress the

accelerator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 - 6

seconds. After cranking the engine,

release the accelerator pedal. Crank

the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the igni-

tion switch to START. Release the

ignition switch when the engine starts.

If the engine starts, but fails to run,

repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, turn the ignition switch

off and wait 10 seconds before cranking

again, otherwise the starter could be

damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive at

moderate speed for a short distance first,

especially in cold weather. In cold weather,

keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-14 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (225,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 2/ 21

3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and

stopping the engine over a short period of

time may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

5. To stop the engine, move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position (CVT model) or move

the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (MT

model), and turn the ignition switch to the

OFF position.

MODELS WITH INTELLIGENT KEY

SYSTEM

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the selector lever is in either of the above

positions.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position. Depress the clutch pedal fully to

the floor.

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

The Intelligent Key must be carried

when operating the ignition switch.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

Depress the brake pedal (CVT models) or

the clutch pedal (MT models) and push the

ignition switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and

release the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal with the ignition switch in

any position.

.If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when restart-

ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little

(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and

while holding, crank the engine. Release

the accelerator pedal when the engine

starts.

.If the engine is very hard to start

because it is flooded, depress the

accelerator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Push the ignition switch to

the ON position to start cranking the

engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop

cranking by pushing the ignition switch

to OFF. After cranking the engine,

release the accelerator pedal. Crank

the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by depressing the

brake pedal and pushing the push-

button ignition switch to start the engine.

If the engine starts, but fails to run,

repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, push the ignition switch

to OFF and wait 10 seconds before

cranking again, otherwise the starter

could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive at

moderate speed for a short distance first,

especially in cold weather. In cold weather,

keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -

3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and

stopping the engine over a short period of

time may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

When racing the engine up to 4,000 rpm or

more under no load condition, the engine

will enter the fuel cut mode.

5. To stop the engine, move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position (CVT models) or

move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position (MT models), and push the ignition

switch to the OFF position.

Starting and driving 5-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (226,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-

MISSION (CVT)

The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

in your vehicle is electronically controlled to

produce maximum power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this

transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle

performance and driving enjoyment.

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the selector

lever out of the P (Park) position.

This CVT is designed so that the foot

brake pedal must be depressed before

shifting from P (Park) to any driving

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

The selector lever cannot be moved out

of the P (Park) position and into any of

the other positions if the ignition

switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or

ACC position or if the key is removed.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed, push

the selector lever button and move the

selector lever to a driving position.

3. Release the parking brake and foot brake

pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in

motion.

WARNING

.Do not depress the accelerator

pedal while shifting from P (Park)

or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D

(Drive). Always depress the brake

pedal until shifting is completed.

Failure to do so could cause you to

lose control and have an accident.

.Cold engine idle speed is high, so

use caution when shifting into a

forward or reverse gear before the

engine has warmed up.

.Never shift to P (Park) or R (Re-

verse) while vehicle is moving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause you to lose

control and have an accident.

CAUTION

.When stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle

by depressing the accelerator pedal.

The foot brake should be used for

this purpose.

.Do not downshift abruptly on slip-

pery roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-16 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (227,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSD1140

Shifting

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button *

Awhile depressing

the brake pedal.

: Push the button *

: Just move the selector lever.

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal, push the selector lever button and move

the selector lever from the P (Park) position to

any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector

lever is in any position while the engine

is not running. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

or roll away and result in serious

personal injury or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or

ACC position for any reason while the selector

lever is in any positions other than the P (Park),

the ignition switch cannot be placed in the

LOCK position.

If the ignition switch cannot be placed in the

LOCK position, perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is

stopped.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position

while depressing the foot brake pedal.

3. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

4. Models with Intelligent Key system:

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

Models without Intelligent Key system:

Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, move

the selector lever to the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position only when the vehi-

cle is completely stopped.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the selector

lever button pushed in to move the selec-

tor lever from N (Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Make sure the

vehicle is completely stopped before selecting

the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal

must be depressed and the selector lever

button pushed in to move the selector

lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any

driving position to R (Reverse).

Starting and driving 5-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (228,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.

The engine can be started in this position. You

may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled

engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode (if so equipped)

When the selector lever is shifted from the D

position to the manual shift gate, the transmis-

sion enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges

can be selected manually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1 ?

/M2 ?

/M3 ?

/M4 ?

/M5 ?

/M6

.When shifting up, move the selector lever to

the + (up) side. The transmission shifts to a

higher range.

.When shifting down, move the selector lever

to the −(down) side. The transmission shifts

to a lower range.

.Moving the selector lever to the same side

twice will shift the ranges in succession.

However, if this motion is rapidly done, the

second shifting may not be completed

properly.

.When canceling the manual shift mode,

return the selector lever to the D (Drive)

position. The transmission returns to the

normal driving mode.

M6 (6th):

Use this position for all normal forward driving at

highway speeds.

M5 (5th):

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or

for engine braking when driving down long

slopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on

downhill grades.

M1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,

sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on

steep downhill grades.

.Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than M6

range. This reduces fuel economy.

.In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected

range. This helps maintain driving per-

formance and reduces the chance of

vehicle damage or loss of control.

.In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down to 1st

gear before the vehicle comes to a

stop. When accelerating again, it is

necessary to shift up to the desired

range.

.When the CVT fluid temperature is extre-

mely low, the manual shift mode may not

work and automatically shift as a drive mode.

This is not a malfunction. In this case, return

the selector lever to the D position and drive

for a while and then shift to the manual shift

mode.

.When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the

shift range may upshift at a lower engine

speed than usual. This is not a malfunction.

Accelerator downshift

— In D position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the

transmission down into a lower gear, depending

on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection mode

This transmission has a high fluid temperature

protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-

5-18 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (229,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

comes too high (for example, when climbing

steep grades in high temperature with heavy

loads), engine power and, under some condi-

tions, vehicle speed will be decreased auto-

matically to reduce the chance of transmission

damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with

the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle

speed may be limited.

Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel spin-

ning and subsequent hard braking, the

fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL

may illuminate to indicate the fail-safe

mode is activated. (See “Malfunction In-

dicator Light (MIL)” in the “2. Instruments

and controls” section.) This will occur even

if all electrical circuits are functioning

properly. In this case, place the ignition

switch in the OFF position and wait for 10

seconds. Then turn the switch back to the

ON position. The vehicle should return to

its normal operating condition. If it does

not return to its normal operating condi-

tion, have a NISSAN dealer check the

transmission and repair if necessary.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature pro-

tection mode or fail-safe operation

occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually

reduced. The reduced speed may be

lower than other traffic, which could

increase the chance of a collision. Be

especially careful when driving. If ne-

cessary, pull to the side of the road at a

safe place and allow the transmission

to return to normal operation, or have it

repaired if necessary.

SSD1142

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the

selector lever may not be moved from the P

(Park) position even with the brake pedal

depressed and the selector lever button pushed.

To move the selector lever, perform the following

procedure:

1. Models with Intelligent Key system:

Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position.

Models without Intelligent Key system:

Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position, and remove the key if it is inserted.

Starting and driving 5-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (230,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover *

using a suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock release using a

suitable tool.

5. Push the selector lever button and move the

selector lever to the N (Neutral) position

while holding down the shift lock release.

Place the ignition switch in the ON position to

unlock the steering wheel (if so equipped). The

vehicle may be moved to the desired location.

Replace the removed shift lock release cover

after the operation.

For models with Intelligent Key system: If the

battery is discharged completely, the steering

wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not move the

vehicle with the steering wheel locked.

If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the

P (Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer check

the CVT system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved

from the P (Park) position while the

engine is running and the brake pedal

is depressed, the stop lights may not

work. Malfunctioning stop lights could

cause an accident injuring yourself and

others.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT)

WARNING

.Do not downshift abruptly on slip-

pery roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

.Do not over-rev the engine when

shifting to a lower gear. This may

cause a loss of control or engine

damage.

.When the high fluid temperature

protection mode or fail-safe opera-

tion occurs, vehicle speed may be

gradually reduced. The reduced

speed may be lower than other

traffic, which could increase the

chance of a collision. Be especially

careful when driving. If necessary,

pull to the side of the road at a safe

place and allow the transmission to

return to normal operation, or have

it repaired if necessary.

CAUTION

.Do not rest your foot on the clutch

pedal while driving. This may da-

mage the clutch.

.Fully depress the clutch pedal be-

fore shifting to help prevent trans-

mission damage.

.Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

.When the vehicle is stopped for a

period of time, for example at a stop

light, shift to N (Neutral) and release

the clutch pedal with the foot brake

applied.

5-20 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (231,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSD0552

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-

shifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into

the appropriate gear, then slowly and smoothly

release the clutch pedal.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,

3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence accord-

ing to vehicle speed.

To back up, pull the shift lever ring *

1upward

and then move it to the R (Reverse) gear after

stopping the vehicle completely.

The shift lever ring returns to its original position

when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral)

position.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into the R

(Reverse) or 1st gear, shift to the N (Neutral)

position, and then release the clutch pedal once.

Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift

into the R (Reverse) or 1st gear.

Suggested upshift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for

shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions

relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.

Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road

conditions, the weather and individual driving

habits.

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not

running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed

(shown below) in any gear. For level road

driving, use the highest gear suggested for that

speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and

drive according to the road conditions, which

will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the

engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may

cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Gear MPH (km/h)

1st 33 (53)

2nd 57 (92)

3rd 79 (127)

4th —

5th —

6th —

Starting and driving 5-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (232,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

The Integrated Control System is located below

the audio system or navigation system (if so

equipped). Two Integrated Control System

modes can be selected: Drive mode and

Climate Control mode.

Depending on which Integrated Control System

mode selected (Drive mode or Climate Control

mode), the screen display and some button

functions will change.

.Drive mode

In the Drive mode, three types of driving

modes can be selected: NORMAL, SPORT

and ECO. See “DRIVE MODE” later in this

section. In addition, while in the Drive mode,

SETUP, Drive information and ECO informa-

tion can be displayed and adjusted. See

“INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM” in the

“2. Instruments and controls” section.

.Climate Control mode

In the Climate Control mode, the climate

control can be set and adjusted. See

“AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER (with

Integrated Control System)” in the “4.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone

systems” section.

SSD1154

DRIVE MODE

1. NORMAL drive mode button

2. Climate control mode select button

3. Drive mode select button

4. SETUP button

5. SPORT drive mode button

6. ECO drive mode button

7. Display screen

8. Enter button/Selection dial

INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

5-22 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (233,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSD1144

Example

Three drive modes (NORMAL, SPORT and

ECO) can be selected depending on the driving

condition. When each mode is selected, the

control state of the engine, CVT (if so

equipped), steering and climate appears on

the display briefly.

Each selected Drive mode (NORMAL, SPORT

or ECO) is displayed at the top of the display

screen.

NOTE:

.The display of the drive mode may be

different from the actual measurement

value according to the driving condi-

tion.

.The vehicle will be set to the NORMAL

drive mode when restarting the engine.

SSD1145

NORMAL drive mode

The NORMAL drive mode is recommended for

normal driving. To set the NORMAL drive mode,

press the Drive mode select button and then

press the NORMAL drive mode button. The

control state of the engine, CVT (if so equipped)

steering and climate is displayed briefly.

When the NORMAL drive mode is selected, a

voltage meter and an engine torque meter

appear on the display screen.

NOTE:

.The voltage meter may change accord-

ing to the driving condition. This is not

a malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (234,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.At start up, the vehicle is automatically

set to the NORMAL drive mode.

SSD1146

SPORT drive mode

The SPORT drive mode is recommended for an

enhanced performance feel. To set the SPORT

drive mode, press the drive mode select button.

The control state of the engine, CVT (if so

equipped), steering and climate control is

displayed briefly. In the SPORT mode, the

engine, CVT (if so equipped) and steering are

set to SPORT. Climate control is set to

NORMAL.

When the SPORT drive mode is selected, a

boost meter appears on the display screen.

NOTE:

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be

reduced.

SSD1147

ECO drive mode

The ECO drive mode is recommended for

maximum fuel economy. In the ECO drive mode,

the engine and CVT (if so equipped) are

adjusted to enhance fuel economy.

To set the ECO drive mode, press the drive

mode select button and then press the ECO

drive mode button. The control state of the

engine, CVT (if so equipped), steering and

climate control is displayed briefly.

When the ECO drive mode is selected, the

current fuel economy appears on the display

screen.

When the climate ECO mode is also switched

5-24 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (235,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

on, the climate control system is adjusted to

further enhance fuel economy.

The climate ECO mode can be switched on or

off in the SETUP mode. See “Setting the climate

ECO mode” later in this section.

NOTE:

.Many driving factors influence fuel

economy. Selecting the ECO drive

mode may not improve fuel economy.

.In the ECO drive mode, performance

may be reduced.

SSD1148

Setting the climate ECO mode:

When the climate ECO mode is switched on,

the climate control system operates to enhance

fuel economy.

To turn the climate ECO mode on or off

1. Press the drive mode select button to select

the drive mode.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the selection dial until “CLIMATE ECO”

is selected.

4. Press the ENTER button to switch climate

ECO on or off. When the CLIMATE ECO

mode is turned on, the CLIMATE ECO

indicator *

Aturns red on the display

screen.

Starting and driving 5-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (236,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

.Be sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving. Failure to

do so can cause brake failure and

lead to an accident.

.Do not release the parking brake

from outside the vehicle.

.Do not use the gear shift in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully

engaged.

.Do not leave children unattended in

a vehicle. They could release the

parking brake and cause an acci-

dent.

SPA2110

To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up *

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. While pulling up on the parking brake lever

slightly, push the button *

2and lower the

lever completely *

3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON-

TROL

.If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

will cancel automatically. The CRUISE in-

dicator light on the meter panel will then

blink to warn the driver.

.If the engine coolant temperature becomes

excessively high, the cruise control system

will cancel automatically.

.If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control MAIN switch off and have the

system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

.The CRUISE indicator light may blink when

the cruise control MAIN switch is turned ON

while pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE,

SET/COAST or CANCEL switch. To prop-

erly set the cruise control system, perform

the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when

driving under the following conditions:

.when it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

.in heavy traffic or in traffic that

varies in speed

.on winding or hilly roads

PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL

5-26 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (237,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

.in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On Manual Transmission (MT) models,

do not shift into N (Neutral) without

depressing the clutch pedal when the

cruise control is set. Should this occur,

depress the clutch pedal and turn the

MAIN switch off immediately. Failure to

do so may cause engine damage.

SSD1128

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

2. SET/COAST switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN

switch on. The CRUISE indicator light will

illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle

to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST

switch and release it. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the

set speed.

.To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously

set speed.

.The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

on winding or hilly roads. If this happens,

drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following methods:

a) Push the CANCEL switch.

b) Tap the brake pedal.

c) Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE

indicator light will turn off.

.If you depress the brake pedal while pushing

the RESUME/ACCELERATE or SET/

COAST switch and reset at the cruising

speed, the cruise control will disengage.

Turn the MAIN switch off once and then turn

it on again.

.The cruise control will automatically cancel if

the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (12

km/h) below the set speed.

.If you move the selector lever to the N

(Neutral) position (Continuously Variable

Starting and driving 5-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (238,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Transmission models) or depressing the

clutch pedal (Manual Transmission models),

the cruise control will be canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

.Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the SET/COAST switch.

.Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE

switch. When the vehicle attains the desired

speed, release the switch.

.Push, then quickly release the RESUME/

ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do

this, the set speed will increase by about 1

MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

.Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET/COAST switch and release it.

.Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle slows

down to the desired speed.

.Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.

The vehicle will resume the last set cruising

speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH

(40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance and

ensure the future reliability and econo-

my of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may

result in shortened engine life and

reduced engine performance.

.Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

.Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

.Avoid quick starts.

.Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

5-28 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (239,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant accelerator

position.

.Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

.Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.

.Select a gear range suitable to road condi-

tions.

.Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

.Keep your engine tuned up.

.Follow the recommended periodic mainte-

nance schedule.

.Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire

wear and lowers fuel economy.

.Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear and

lowers fuel economy.

.Air conditioner operation lowers fuel econ-

omy. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

.When cruising at highway speeds, it is more

economical to use the air conditioner and

leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

.Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

(See “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATION” in the “9. Technical

and consumer information” section.)

WARNING

.For AWD equipped vehicles, do not

attempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with

the engine running. Doing so may

result in drivetrain damage or un-

expected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle da-

mage or personal injury.

.Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-

namometer (such as the dynam-

ometers used by some states for

emissions testing) or similar equip-

ment even if the other two wheels

are raised off the ground. Make sure

that you inform the test facility

personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with AWD before it is

placed on a dynamometer. Using

the wrong test equipment may re-

sult in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle da-

mage or personal injury.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so

equipped)

Starting and driving 5-29

Information Provided by:

Black plate (240,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SSD1129

AWD mode switch

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODE

SWITCH OPERATIONS

The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system is used to

select the 2WD (Two-Wheel Drive), AWD-V or

AWD mode depending on the driving condi-

tions.

The AWD mode indicator lights (

(green), ) are located in the instrument

panel.

The AWD mode indicator lights (green)

illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to

the ON position. The indicator lights turn off

within 1 second.

The AWD mode indicator lights will display the

mode selected by the AWD mode switch while

engine is running.

If the AWD warning light (yellow) illumi-

nates, the AWD mode indicator lights will turn

off.

Push the AWD mode switch, located on the

instrument panel, to select 2WD, AWD-V or

AWD.

AWD-V: Push the AWD mode switch to the

neutral (AWD-V) position. The All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) AWD-V indicator light in the meter

illuminates.

2WD: Push the AWD mode switch to the 2WD

position.

AWD: Push the AWD mode switch to the AWD

position. The AWD indicator light (green)

in the meter illuminates.

5-30 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (241,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 2/ 21

AWD mode Wheels driven

AWD mode indicator light

( , (green)) Use conditions

2WD

Front wheels:

The wheel drive mode is in

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD)

when driving on a normal road.

Turns off For driving on dry,

paved roads

AWD-V

Distribution of torque to the

front and rear wheels changes

automatically [ratio; 100 : 0

(2WD) ?50 : 50 (AWD)] and

distribution of torque between

left and right wheel of rear

wheels changes automatically

depending on road conditions

encountered [ratio; 100 : 0

(2WD) ?50 : 50 (AWD)].

Illuminates For driving on paved or

slippery roads

AWD

Distribution of torque to the

front and rear wheels changes

automatically [ratio; 100 : 0

(2WD) ?50 : 50 (AWD)] and

the distribution of torque be-

tween the left and right rear

wheels changes automatically

depending on the slippery

road conditions encountered.

Illuminates (green) For driving on slippery

roads

AWD shift tips

.If the AWD mode switch is operated while

making a turn, accelerating or decelerating,

or if the ignition switch is turned off while in

the AWD-V or AWD mode, you may feel a

jolt. This is normal.

.The oil temperature of power train parts will

increase if the vehicle is continuously

operated under conditions where the differ-

ence in rotation between the front and rear

wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when

driving the vehicle on rough roads through

sand or mud or when freeing a stuck vehicle.

In these cases, the AWD warning light blinks

rapidly and the AWD mode changes to the

2WD mode to protect the power train parts.

If you stop driving with the engine idling and

wait until the warning light stops blinking,

the AWD returns to the AWD-V or AWD

mode.

.Brake distance in the AWD mode is the

same as 2WD.

CAUTION

.Do not start the engine with the

AWD mode switch in any mode in

the following cases:

— when the vehicle is placed on a

free-roller or jacking up the

Starting and driving 5-31

Information Provided by:

Black plate (242,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

vehicle with the front tires

raised and the rear tires on the

ground.

— when towing the vehicle with the

rear tires raised from the

ground.

.Operate the AWD mode switch only

when driving straight. Do not oper-

ate the AWD mode switch when

making a turn or backing up.

.Do not operate the AWD mode

switch with the front wheel spin-

ning.

.Engine idling speed is high while

warming up the engine. Be espe-

cially careful when starting or driv-

ing on slippery surfaces with the

AWD mode switch set in the AWD-V

or AWD mode.

SSD0336-D

AWD WARNING LIGHT

The AWD warning light located in the instrument

panel illuminates when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position. It turns off soon after

the engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system

while the engine is running, or while driving, the

warning light will either remain illuminated or

blink.

High-temperature power train oil due to con-

tinuous operation of the vehicle to free a stuck

vehicle makes the warning light blink rapidly

(about twice per second). The driving mode may

change to the 2WD mode. If the warning light

blinks rapidly during operation, stop the vehicle

with the engine idling in a safe place immedi-

ately. Then if the light goes off after a while, you

can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of

front and rear wheels will make the warning light

blink slowly (about once per 2 seconds). Pull off

the road in a safe area, and idle the engine.

Check that all tire sizes are the same, tire

pressure is correct and tires are not worn.

Change the AWD mode switch to the 2WD

mode and do not drive fast.

CAUTION

.If the warning light illuminates while

driving, AWD mode will be changed

to 2WD mode. Reduce the vehicle

speed and have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible. Be especially

careful when driving.

5-32 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (243,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.The power train may be damaged if

you continue driving with the AWD

warning light blinking rapidly.

SSD0488

WARNING

.Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

.Never leave the engine running

while the vehicle is unattended.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

.Safe parking procedures require

that both the parking brake be

applied and the transmission placed

into P (Park) for Continuously Vari-

able Transmission (CVT) model or in

an appropriate gear for Manual

Transmission (MT) model. Failure

to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and

result in an accident.

.Make sure the continuously variable

transmission selector lever has

been pushed as far forward as it

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-33

Information Provided by:

Black plate (244,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

can go and cannot be moved with-

out depressing the foot brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) gear.

When parking on an uphill grade, place the

shift lever in the 1st gear.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

the street when parked on a sloping drive

way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels

as illustrated.

.HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: *

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel

gently touches the curb.

.HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: *

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

.HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB: *

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the

center of the road if it moves.

4. Models with Intelligent Key system:

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

Models without Intelligent Key system:

Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position and remove the key.

WARNING

.If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

.When the electric power steering

warning light illuminates with the

engine running, the power assist for

the steering will cease operation.

You will still have control of the

vehicle but the steering will be

harder to operate.

The electric power steering system is designed

to provide power assist while driving to operate

the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly

or continuously while parking or driving at a very

low speed, the power assist for the steering

wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent

overheating of the electric power steering

system and protect it from getting damaged.

While the power assist is reduced, steering

wheel operation will become heavy. When the

temperature of the electric power steering

system goes down, the power assist level will

return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering

wheel operations that could cause the electric

power steering system to overheat.

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING

SYSTEM

5-34 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (245,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

You may hear a fricative sound when the

steering wheel is operated quickly. However,

this is not a malfunction.

If the electric power steering warning light

illuminates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the electric power steering system is

not functioning properly and may need servicing.

Have the electric power steering system

checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See “Electric

power steering warning light” in the “2. Instru-

ments and controls” section.)

When the electric power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, the power

assist for the steering will cease operation. You

will still have control of the vehicle. However,

greater steering effort is needed, especially in

sharp turns and at low speeds.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

You may feel a small click and hear a sound

when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly.

This is not a malfunction and indicates that the

brake assist mechanism is operating properly.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and the stopping

distance will be longer.

When the brake pedal is depressed slowly and

firmly, you may hear a clicking noise and feel a

slight pulsation. This is normal and indicates that

the Brake Assist System is operating.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will cause overheating of the

brakes, wearing out the brake pads and shoes

faster and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

.While driving on a slippery surface,

be careful when braking, accelerat-

ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking

or accelerating could cause the

wheelstoskidandresultinan

accident.

.If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the brakes will not work.

Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up

the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to

normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds

until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-35

Information Provided by:

Black plate (246,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual and can be performed by a

NISSAN dealer.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is

activated generating greater braking force than a

conventional brake booster even with light pedal

force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

.The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

is a sophisticated device, but it

cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain

vehicle control during braking on

slippery surfaces. Remember that

stopping distances on slippery sur-

faces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with ABS. Stopping

distances may also be longer on

rough, gravel or snow covered

roads, or if you are using tire chains.

Alwaysmaintainasafedistance

from the vehicle in front of you.

Ultimately, the driver is responsible

for safety.

.Tire type and condition may also

affect braking effectiveness.

— When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

— When installing a spare tire,

make sure that it is the proper

size and type as specified on the

Tire and Loading Information

label. See “TIRE AND LOADING

INFORMATION LABEL” in the “9.

Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

— For detailed information, see

“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the

“8. Maintenance and do-it-your-

self” section of this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls

the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each

BRAKE ASSIST

5-36 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (247,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to

prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By

preventing each wheel from locking, the system

helps the driver maintain steering control and

helps to minimize swerving and spinning on

slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from

locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping dis-

tances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward

or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may

hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the

brake pedal. This is normal and does not

indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses

a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and

illuminates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then oper-

ates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH

(5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly

applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This

action is similar to pumping the brakes very

quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or

feel a vibration from the actuator when it is

operating. This is normal and indicates that the

ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa-

tion may indicate that road conditions are

hazardous and extra care is required while

driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs

and vehicle motion. Under certain driving con-

ditions, the VDC system helps to perform the

following functions.

.Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is

transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on

the same axle.

.Controls brake pressure and engine output

to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle

speed (traction control function).

.Controls brake pressure at individual wheels

and engine output to help the driver maintain

control of the vehicle in the following

conditions:

— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the

steered path despite increased steering

input)

— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to

certain road or driving conditions).

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain

control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss

of vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the VDC

warning light in the instrument panel

flashes so note the following:

.The road may be slippery or the system may

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-37

Information Provided by:

Black plate (248,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

determine some action is required to help

keep the vehicle on the steered path.

.You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise or vibration from under the

hood. This is normal and indicates that the

VDC system is working properly.

.Adjust your speed and driving to the road

conditions.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC

warning light illuminates in the instrument

panel. The VDC system automatically turns off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC

system. The VDC off indicator illuminates

to indicate the VDC system is off. When the

VDC switch is used to turn off the system, the

VDC system still operates to prevent one drive

wheel from slipping by transferring power to a

non slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning light

flashes if this occurs. All other VDC

functions are off, and the VDC warning light

will not flash. The VDC system is auto-

matically reset to on when the ignition switch is

placed in the off position then back to the on

position.

See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in

reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test

occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel

a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and

is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

.The VDC system is designed to help

improve driving stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed

and be especially careful when driv-

ing and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

.Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs,

stabilizer bars, bushings and

wheels are not NISSAN recom-

mended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC

system may not operate properly.

This could adversely affect vehicle

handling performance, and the VDC

warning light may illuminate.

.If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extre-

mely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and the

VDC warning light may illumi-

nate.

.If engine control related parts are

not NISSAN recommended or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC

warning light may illuminate.

.When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked

corners, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC warn-

ing light may illuminate. Do not

drive on these types of roads.

.When driving on an unstable sur-

face such as a turntable, ferry,

elevator or ramp, the VDC warning

light may illuminate. This is not

a malfunction. Restart the engine

after driving onto a stable surface.

.If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC warn-

ing light may illuminate.

5-38 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (249,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.The VDC system is not a substitute

for winter tires or tire chains on a

snow covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the

key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob.

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

outside temperature will drop below 328F(08C),

check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter

protection. For additional information, see “EN-

GINE COOLING SYSTEM” in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the battery

fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To

maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should

be checked regularly. For additional information,

see “BATTERY” in the “8. Maintenance and do-

it-yourself” section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system, including the

engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For details, see “ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide

superior performance on dry pavement. How-

ever, the performance of these tires will be

substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi-

tions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy

roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &

SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,

speed rating and availability information.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S. states

and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws before

installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

Tire chains may be used. For details, see “TIRE

CHAINS” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model

If you install snow tires, they must also be the

same size, brand, construction and tread pattern

on all four wheels.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (250,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

.A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

.A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

.A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-

drifts.

.Extra window washer fluid to refill the

reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

.Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick

and very hard to drive on. The

vehicle will have much less traction

or “grip” under these conditions. Try

to avoid driving on wet ice until the

road is salted or sanded.

.Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels

will lose even more traction.

.Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pave-

ment.

.Allow greater following distances

on slippery roads.

.Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a

patch of ice is seen ahead, brake

before reaching it. Try not to brake

while on the ice, and avoid any

sudden steering maneuvers.

.Do not use cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

.Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist in cold

temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when

the outside temperature is 208F(−78C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-

volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on

outside temperatures, to properly warm the

engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to

turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

WARNING

.Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical sys-

tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can

be seriously injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded

connection.

.Disconnect and properly store the

engine block heater cord before

5-40 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (251,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

starting the engine. Damage to the

cord could result in an electrical

shock and can cause serious injury.

.Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least

10A. Plug the extension cord into a

Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-

tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.

Failure to use the proper extension

cord or a grounded outlet can result

in a fire or electrical shock and

cause serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-41

Information Provided by:

Black plate (252,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

MEMO

5-42 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (19,1)

6 In case of emergency

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Flat tire ............................................................ 6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 6-2

Changing a flat tire......................................... 6-2

Jump starting .................................................... 6-7

Push starting..................................................... 6-9

If your vehicle overheats....................................... 6-9

Towing your vehicle .......................................... 6-10

Towing recommended by NISSAN ................... 6-11

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ........... 6-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (254,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire

pressure of all tires except the spare. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or

more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you

of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This

system will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For

more details, see “WARNING/INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the

“2. Instruments and controls” section and “TIRE

PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

.If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull

off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble. Driving with under-inflated tires

may permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in serious

personal injury. Check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD

tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as possi-

ble.

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will

remain on after 1 minute. Contact

your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/

or system resetting.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake.

4. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)

position.

5. Turn off the engine.

6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

7. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (255,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

.Make sure the parking brake is

securely applied and the Manual

Transmission is shifted into R (Re-

verse), or the Continuously Variable

Transmission into P (Park).

.Never change tires when the vehicle

is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.

This is hazardous.

.Never change tires if oncoming

traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait

for professional road assistance. MCE0001A

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks *

1at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat

tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is

jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the

vehicle may move and result in personal

injury.

SCE0946

Jacking tools

Getting the spare tire and tools

Open the lift gate. Raise the cargo floor board

1. Remove jacking tools.

In case of emergency 6-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (256,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SCE0947

The spare tire is located under the cargo floor

board.

Loosen the clamp *

2and remove the spacer

1and take out the spare tire.

Jacking up the vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

.Never get under the vehicle while it

is supported only by the jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

.Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle

on other vehicles. The jack is de-

signed for lifting only your vehicle

during a tire change.

.Use the correct jack-up points.

Never use any other part of the

vehicle for jack support.

.Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

.Never use blocks on or under the

jack.

.Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack, as it may

cause the vehicle to move.

.Do not allow passengers to stay in

the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

6-4 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (257,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SCE0948

Jack-up point

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.

Also fit the groove of the jack head between

the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm

ground.

SCE0504

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning it counterclockwise with the wheel

nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel

nuts until the tire is off the ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod with both hands as shown above.

Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears

the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and

then remove the tire.

In case of emergency 6-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (258,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SCE0933

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. (See specific instructions under the

heading “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight. Check that all the

wheel nuts contact the wheel surface

horizontally.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence

as illustrated (*

1,*

2,*

3,*

4,*

5), more

than 2 times, until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the

vehicle completely.

WARNING

.Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

.Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts. This could

cause the nuts to become loose.

.Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600

miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a

flat tire, etc.).

.As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened

to specifications at all times. It is

recommended that the wheel nuts be

tightened to specifications at each

lubrication interval.

.Adjust tire pressure to the COLD

pressure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked for 3

hours or more or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label

affixed to the driver side center pillar.

Stowing the damaged tire and the tools

1. Securely store the jack, tools and the

damaged tire in the storage area.

2. Replace the cargo floor box and board.

3. Close the lift gate.

WARNING

.Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can

become dangerous projectiles in an

accident or sudden stop.

.The spare tire and small size spare

tire are designed for emergency use.

6-6 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (259,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

See specific instructions under the

heading “WHEELS AND TIRES” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-your-

self” section.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be

followed.

WARNING

.If done incorrectly, jump starting

can lead to a battery explosion,

resulting in severe injury or death.

It could also damage your vehicle.

.Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away

from the battery.

.Do not allow battery fluid to come

into contact with eyes, skin, clothing

or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is

a corrosive sulfuric acid solution

which can cause severe burns. If

the fluid should come into contact

with anything, immediately flush the

contacted area with water.

.Keep the battery out of the reach of

children.

.The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

.Whenever working on or near a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors (for example, goggles or

industrial safety spectacles) and

remove rings, metal bands, or any

other jewelry. Do not lean over the

battery when jump starting.

.Do not attempt to jump start a

frozen battery. It could explode

and cause serious injury.

.Your vehicle has an automatic en-

gine cooling fan. It could come on at

any time. Keep hands and other

objects away from it.

JUMP STARTING

In case of emergency 6-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (260,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 2/ 21

SCE0981

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause

personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle

B, position the two vehicles (*

Aand *

to bring their batteries into close proximity to

each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position.

4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems

(headlights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

5. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly

wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion

hazard.

6. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as

illustrated (*

1?*

2?*

3?*

4).

For the vehicle equipped with Intelli-

gent Key system:

If the battery is discharged, the ignition

switch cannot be moved from the OFF

position. Connect the jumper cables to

the booster vehicle *

Bbefore turning

the ignition switch.

CAUTION

.Always connect positive (+) to posi-

tive (+) and negative (−) to body

ground (for example, as illustrated),

not to the battery.

.Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that the cable

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

7. Start the engine of the booster vehicle *

and let it run for a few minutes.

8. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle *

Bat about 2,000 rpm, and start

the engine of the vehicle *

Abeing jump

started.

6-8 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (261,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, place the

ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait 10 seconds before trying again.

9. After starting your engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable (*

4?*

3?*

2?*

1).

10. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover

the vent holes as it may be contaminated

with corrosive acid.

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION

.Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models cannot be push-

started or tow-started. Attempting

to do so may cause transmission

damage.

.Three-way catalyst equipped mod-

els should not be started by pushing

since the three way catalyst may be

damaged.

.Never try to start the vehicle by

towing it; when the engine starts,

the forward surge could cause the

vehicle to collide with the tow

vehicle.

CAUTION

.Do not continue to drive if your

vehicle overheats. Doing so could

cause engine damage or a vehicle

fire.

.To avoid the danger of being

scalded, never remove the radiator

cap while the engine is still hot.

When the radiator cap is removed,

pressurized hot water will spurt out,

possibly causing serious injury.

.Do not open the hood if steam is

coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if

you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc., take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road and

apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (262,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

position.

Do not stop the engine.

3. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).

Open all the windows, move the heater or air

conditioner temperature control to maximum

hot and fan control to high speed.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. (If steam or

coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)

Do not open the hood further until no steam

or coolant can be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

6. Visually check the drive belt for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or

the cooling fan does not run, stop the

engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or

the engine cooling fan. The engine

cooling fan can start at any time.

7. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the reservoir with the engine

running. Add coolant to the reservoir if

necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a

NISSAN dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must

be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could

damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are

available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service

operators are familiar with the applicable laws

and procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage to

your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you

have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is

advisable to have the service operator carefully

read the following precautions.

WARNING

.Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

.Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

.When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working con-

dition. If any unit is damaged, dol-

lies must be used.

.Always attach safety chains before

towing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-10 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (263,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

For information about towing your vehicle behind

a recreational vehicle (RV), see “FLAT TOW-

ING” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

SCE0950

Two-wheel drive models

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (front) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as

illustrated.

CAUTION

.Never tow CVT models with the front

wheels on the ground or four

wheels on the ground (forward or

backward), as this may cause ser-

ious and expensive damage to the

transmission. If it is necessary to

tow the vehicle with the rear wheels

raised, always use towing dollies

under the rear wheels.

.When towing CVT models with the

front wheels on towing dollies:

Push the ignition switch to the

ACC or ON position, and secure

the steering wheel in a straight-

ahead position with a rope or simi-

lar device. Move the selector lever

to the N (Neutral) position.

.When towing a CVT model with the

In case of emergency 6-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (264,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

rear wheels on the ground (if you do

not use towing dollies): Always

release the parking brake.

SCE0952

All-wheel drive models

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be

used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be

placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow Intelligent AWD models with

any of the wheels on the ground as this

may cause serious and expensive da-

mage to the powertrain.

6-12 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (265,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SCE0951

Front

SCE0833

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

WARNING

.Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

.Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode

and result in serious injury. Parts of

your vehicle could also overheat

and be damaged.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

Do not use the tie down hook for towing or

vehicle recovery.

Front:

1. Remove the hook cover *

1from the

bumper with a suitable tool.

2. Securely install the recovery hook *

2as

illustrated.

Make sure that the hook is properly secured in

its original position after use.

SCE0678

Rear

Rear:

Do not use the tie down hook to pull the vehicle.

CAUTION

.Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to the vehicle recovery

hook or main structural members of

the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle

body will be damaged.

.Do not use the vehicle tie down

hook to free a vehicle stuck in sand,

snow, mud, etc.

.Never tow a vehicle using the vehi-

In case of emergency 6-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (266,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

cle tie down hook or recovery hook.

.Always pull the cable straight out

from the front of the vehicle. Never

pull on the vehicle at an angle.

.Pulling devices should be routed so

they do not touch any part of the

suspension, steering, brake or cool-

ing systems.

.Pulling devices such as ropes or

canvas straps are not recommended

for use in vehicle towing or recov-

ery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

.Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive) (Continuously

Variable Transmission models) or 1st

and R (Reverse) (Manual Transmission

models).

.Apply the accelerator as little as possi-

ble to maintain the rocking motion.

.Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R and D (Continuously

Variable Transmission models) or 1st

and R (Manual Transmission models).

.Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55

km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service

to remove the vehicle.

6-14 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (267,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

MEMO

In case of emergency 6-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (268,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (22,1)

7 Appearance and care

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Cleaning exterior ................................................ 7-2

Washing ...................................................... 7-2

Waxing ........................................................ 7-2

Removing spots............................................. 7-3

Underbody ................................................... 7-3

Glass .......................................................... 7-3

Wheels........................................................ 7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels .................................... 7-3

Chrome parts ................................................ 7-3

Tire dressing ................................................. 7-3

Cleaning interior ................................................ 7-4

Air fresheners................................................ 7-4

Floor mats .................................................... 7-5

Seat belts .................................................... 7-6

Corrosion protection ........................................... 7-6

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion...................................................... 7-6

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion...................................................... 7-6

To protect your vehicle from corrosion................. 7-6

Information Provided by:

Black plate (270,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

In order to maintain the appearance of your

vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle

as soon as you can:

.after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain

.after driving on coastal roads

.when contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs

get on the paint surface

.when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and

plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly

using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with

clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

.Do not use car washes that use acid

in the detergent. Some car washes,

especially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to func-

tion properly. Always check with

your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

.Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical

detergents, gasoline or solvents.

.Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or while the vehicle body is

hot, as the surface may become

water-spotted.

.Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface

by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing

is recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

reapplying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

.Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions supplied

with the wax.

.Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a

base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

Information Provided by:

Black plate (271,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage

or staining. Special cleaning products are

available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive

accessory stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, the

underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will

prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the

underbody and suspension. Before the winter

period and again in the spring, the underseal

must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust

film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass

to become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could da-

mage the electrical conductors, radio

antenna elements or rear window

defroster elements.

WHEELS

Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to

maintain their appearance.

.Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

.Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

.NISSAN recommends that the road wheels

be waxed to protect against road salt in

areas where it is used during winter.

CAUTION

Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a

mild soap solution, especially during winter

months in areas where road salt is used. Salt

could discolor the wheels if not removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

.Do not use a cleaner that uses

strong acid or alkali contents to

clean the wheels.

.Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The

wheel temperature should be the

same as ambient temperature.

.Rinse the wheel to completely re-

move the cleaner within 15 minutes

after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSING

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the

rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it

may react with the coating and form a com-

pound. This compound may come off the tire

while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

Appearance and care 7-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (272,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

following precautions:

.Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an

oil-based tire dressing.

.Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire tread/

grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

.Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is

completely removed from the tire tread/

grooves.

.Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dam-

pened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean

with a dry soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric

protectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifica-

tion sensors. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and

result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

.Never use benzine, thinner, or any

similar material.

.Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to the leather sur-

faces and should be removed

promptly. Do not use saddle soap,

car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning

fluids, solvents, detergents or am-

monia-based cleaners as they may

damage the leather’s natural finish.

.Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

.Do not use glass or plastic cleaner

on meter or gauge lens covers. It

may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could

affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air

freshener, take the following precautions:

.Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they contact

vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air

freshener in a location that allows it to hang

free and not contact an interior surface.

.Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration when

spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s

instructions before using air fresheners.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

Information Provided by:

Black plate (273,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision or injury:

.NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver front

position.

.Use only genuine NISSAN floor

mats specifically designed for use

in your vehicle model. See your

NISSAN dealer for more informa-

tion.

.Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat posi-

tioning aid. See “Floor mat posi-

tioning aid” later in this section.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. Mats should be

maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if

they become excessively worn.

SAI0050

Front (example)

Floor mat positioning aid

This model includes front floor mat brackets to

act as floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor

mats have been specially designed for your

vehicle model. The front floor mats have

grommet holes in them. To install, simply

position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket

through the floor mat grommet hole while

centering the mat in the floorwell.

Periodically check to make certain that the mats

are properly positioned.

SAI0055

Bracket positions

The illustration shows the location of the floor

mat brackets.

Appearance and care 7-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (274,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap

solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in

the shade before using them.

See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these materials may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI-

BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION

.The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

.Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-

ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the

vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-

sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely

inside the vehicle, and should be removed for

drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing where

atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt

is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the rate

of corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will

accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will

also accelerate the disintegration of paint

surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

.Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

.Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

.Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

.Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CAUTION

.NEVER remove dirt, sand or other

debris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

.Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic

components inside the vehicle as

CORROSION PROTECTION

7-6 Appearance and care

Information Provided by:

Black plate (275,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some areas,

consult a NISSAN dealer.

Appearance and care 7-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (276,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

Information Provided by:

Black plate (25,1)

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Maintenance requirement ..................................... 8-2

Scheduled maintenance................................... 8-2

General maintenance ...................................... 8-2

Where to go for service................................... 8-2

General maintenance .......................................... 8-2

Explanation of maintenance items....................... 8-2

Maintenance precautions ..................................... 8-5

Engine compartment check locations ...................... 8-6

MR16DDT engine .......................................... 8-6

Engine cooling system......................................... 8-7

Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-7

Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-8

Engine oil......................................................... 8-8

Checking engine oil level ................................. 8-8

Changing engine oil and filter............................ 8-8

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid........ 8-11

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid .................. 8-11

Window washer fluid ........................................ 8-12

Battery .......................................................... 8-12

Jump starting .............................................. 8-14

Variable voltage control system............................ 8-14

Drive belt ....................................................... 8-14

Spark plugs .................................................... 8-15

Replacing spark plugs ................................... 8-15

Air cleaner...................................................... 8-16

Windshield wiper blades.................................... 8-16

Cleaning .................................................... 8-16

Replacing................................................... 8-17

Rear window wiper blade................................... 8-18

Brakes........................................................... 8-18

Self-adjusting brakes .................................... 8-18

Brake pad wear warning ................................ 8-18

Fuses ............................................................ 8-19

Engine compartment ..................................... 8-19

Passenger compartment ................................ 8-20

Key battery replacement .................................... 8-21

Keyfob....................................................... 8-21

Intelligent Key.............................................. 8-22

Lights............................................................ 8-24

Headlights.................................................. 8-25

Exterior and interior lights............................... 8-26

Wheels and tires.............................................. 8-27

Tire pressure............................................... 8-27

Tire labeling ................................................ 8-31

Types of tires .............................................. 8-33

Tire chains.................................................. 8-33

Changing wheels and tires ............................. 8-34

Information Provided by:

Black plate (278,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have

minimum maintenance requirements with long

service intervals to save you both time and

money. However, some day-to-day and regular

maintenance is essential to maintain your

NISSAN’s fine mechanical condition, as well

as its emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper

maintenance care. You are a vital link in the

maintenance chain.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

For your convenience, both required and op-

tional scheduled maintenance items are de-

scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and

Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that

guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is

performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal day-

to-day operation. They are essential for proper

vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to

perform these procedures regularly as pre-

scribed.

Performing general maintenance checks re-

quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few

general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a

NISSAN dealer.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and serviced by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

and are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-dealership information systems.

They are completely qualified to work on

NISSAN vehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs the best job to

meet the maintenance requirements on your

vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smell, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that

repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, see “MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS”

later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE

ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors

and the engine hood operate properly. Also

ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate

hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if

necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch

keeps the hood from opening when the primary

latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (279,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,

and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if

necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If

necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires,

including the spare, to the pressure specified.

Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive

wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap

when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or

abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for

wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal

highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer

to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War-

ranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a

damaged windshield repaired by a qualified

repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks

or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when

performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning

the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the pedal

does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep

the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to

stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep

the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly

steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely

with the selector lever in the P (Park) position

without applying any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the

parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs

adjusted, see a NISSAN dealer.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt

webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliners, etc. to ensure

they operate smoothly and that all latches lock

securely in every position. Check that the head

restraints/headrests move up and down

smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped)

hold securely in all latched positions.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive free play,

hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that

all warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (280,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and

in sufficient quantity when operating the heater

or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washers operate properly and

that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.

It should be between the MAX and MIN lines.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe condition require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid level*: Make sure that

the brake and clutch fluid level is between the

MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belt*: Make sure that the drive

belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level surface and turning off the

engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. (See

“PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,

oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected

immediately.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances, other-

wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and around the exhaust system. At the end

of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-

late. For additional information, see “CLEANING

EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance and care”

section.

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (281,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

When performing any inspection or mainte-

nance work on your vehicle, always take care

to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or

damage to the vehicle. The following are general

precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

.Park the vehicle on a level surface,

apply the parking brake securely

and block the wheels to prevent

the vehicle from moving. Move the

selector lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion or the shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position.

.Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position when per-

forming any parts replacement or

repairs.

.If you must work with the engine

running, keep your hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from moving

fans, belts and any other moving

parts.

.It is advisable to secure or remove

any loose clothing and remove any

jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.

before working on your vehicle.

.Always wear eye protection when-

ever you work on your vehicle.

.If you must run the engine in an

enclosed space such as a garage, be

sure there is proper ventilation for

exhaust gases to escape.

.Never get under the vehicle while it

is supported only by a jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

.Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from fuel tank and the

battery.

.The fuel filter or fuel lines should be

serviced by a NISSAN dealer be-

cause the fuel lines are under high

pressure even when the engine is

off.

CAUTION

.Do not work under the hood while

the engine is hot. Turn the engine

off and wait until it cools down.

.Avoid direct contact with used en-

gine oil and coolant. Improperly

disposed engine oil, and engine

coolant and/or other vehicle fluids

can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations

for disposal of vehicle fluid.

.Never leave the engine or the CVT

related component harnesses dis-

connected while the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

.Never connect or disconnect the

battery or any transistorized com-

ponent while the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

.Your vehicle is equipped with an

automatic engine cooling fan. It may

come on at any time without warn-

ing, even if the ignition key is in the

OFF position and the engine is not

running. To avoid injury, always

disconnect the negative battery

cable before working near the fan.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also

available. (See “OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in the “9.

Technical and consumer information” section.)

Youshouldbeawarethatincompleteor

improper servicing may result in operating

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (282,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

difficulties or excessive emissions, and could

affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, we recommend that

it be done by a NISSAN dealer.

SDI2639

MR16DDT ENGINE

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Radiator filler cap

3. Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Window washer fluid reservoir

6. Engine drive belt location

7. Engine oil dipstick

8. Engine coolant reservoir

9. Fuse/fusible link holder

10. Battery

*: for Manual Transmission (MT) models

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (283,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) to provide year-round anti-freeze

and coolant protection. The anti-freeze solution

contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional

engine cooling system additives are not neces-

sary.

WARNING

.Never remove the radiator or cool-

ant reservoir cap when the engine is

hot. Wait until the engine and

radiator cool down. Serious burns

could be caused by high pressure

fluid escaping from the radiator.

See precautions in “IF YOUR VEHI-

CLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case

of emergency” section of this man-

ual.

.The radiator is equipped with a

pressure type radiator cap. To pre-

vent engine damage, use only a

genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

.If the engine was stopped soon

when the engine is hot, the cooling

fan may operate for approximately

10 minutes after the engine was

stopped to cool the components in

the engine compartment. When the

cooling fan is operating, be sure

that hands or other items do not get

caught in it.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted

to provide antifreeze protection to

−348F(−378C). If additional freeze pro-

tection is needed due to weather where

you operate your vehicle, add Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) concentrate following the direc-

tions on the container. If an equivalent

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is

used, follow the coolant manufacture’s

instructions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to −348F(−378C). The

use of other types of coolant solutions

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

may damage the engine cooling sys-

tem.

SDI2641

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

the MIN level *

2, open the reservoir cap and

add coolant up to the MAX level *

1. If the

reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the

radiator when the engine is cold. If there is

insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and also add

it to the reservoir up to the MAX level *

Tighten the cap securely after adding engine

coolant.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (284,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be per-

formed by a NISSAN dealer. The service

procedures can be found in the appropriate

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

.To avoid the danger of being

scalded, never change the coolant

when the engine is hot.

.Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burns

could be caused by high pressure

fluid escaping from the radiator.

.Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made,

wash thoroughly with soap or hand

cleaner as soon as possible.

.Keep coolant out of reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

SDI1993

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be within the range *

C. If the

oil level is below *

A, remove the oil filler

cap and pour recommended oil through the

opening. Do not overfill *

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the break-

in period, depending on the severity of

operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the

engine, and such damage is not cov-

ered by the warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

Change the engine oil and filter according to the

maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches the operating

temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes.

ENGINE OIL

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (285,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 1/ 7

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a

suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.

.Place the safety jack stands under the

vehicle jack-up points.

.A suitable adapter should be attached to

the jack stand saddle.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and sup-

port points are used to avoid vehicle

damage.

SDI2652

SDI2651

1. Oil filler cap

2. Oil drain plug

3. Oil filter

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and

completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the

engine oil is hot.

.Waste oil must be disposed of

properly.

.Check your local regulations.

(Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the engine

oil filter change is needed.)

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.

Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface

with a clean rag.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (286,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 1/ 7

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket

material remaining on the mounting

surface of the engine. Failure to do so

could lead to engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight

resistance is felt, then tighten additionally

more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb

(14.7 to 20.5 N·m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a

new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug

with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29 to 39 N·m)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill the engine with the recommended oil

through the oil filler opening, and install the

oil filler cap securely.

See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical

and consumer information” section for drain

and refill capacity. The drain and refill

capacity depends on the oil temperature

and drain time. Use these specifications for

reference only. Always use the dipstick to

determine the proper amount of oil in the

engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the drain plug and the oil filter.

Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.

Add engine oil if necessary.

After the operation

1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

2. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

WARNING

.Prolonged and repeated contact

with used engine oil may cause skin

cancer.

.Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made,

wash thoroughly with soap or hand

cleaner as soon as possible.

.Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (287,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

When checking or replacement is required, we

recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

.Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid

NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.

.Using transmission fluid other than

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2

will damage the CVT, which is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle

limited warranty.

For additional brake and clutch fluid information,

see “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

.Use only new fluid from a sealed

container. Old, inferior or contami-

nated fluid may damage the brake

andclutchsystems.Theuseof

improper fluids can damage the

brake and clutch systems, and affect

the vehicle’s stopping ability.

.Clean the filler cap before removing.

.Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous

and should be stored carefully in

marked containers out of the reach

of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted

surfaces. This will damage the paint. If

fluid is spilled, immediately wash the

surface with water.

SDI2655

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is

below the MIN line *

2or the brake warning

light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super

Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3

fluid up to the MAX line *

1. If fluid must be

added frequently, the system should be checked

by a NISSAN dealer.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so

equipped) FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (288,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI2429

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the

cap and pour the window washer fluid into the

reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s

instructions for the mixture ratio.

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally.

To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug

the center hole *

1of the cap/tube assembly,

then remove it from the reservoir. If there is no

fluid in the tube, add fluid.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of

window washer fluid.

Recommended fluid:

Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concen-

trate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

CAUTION

.Do not substitute engine anti-freeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the

paint.

.Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based washer fluid

concentrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

window washer reservoir tank.

.Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s

recommended levels before pouring

the fluid into the window washer

reservoir tank. Do not use the

window washer reservoir tank to

mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

.Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

.Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

.If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative 7battery

terminal cable to prevent discharging it.

WARNING

.Do not expose the battery to flames

or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas

generated by the battery is explo-

sive. Do not allow battery fluid to

contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or

painted surfaces. After touching a

battery or battery cap, do not touch

or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash

your hands. If the acid contacts your

eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15

minutes and seek medical attention.

.Do not operate the vehicle if the

fluid in the battery is low. Low

battery fluid can cause a higher load

on the battery which can generate

heat, reduce battery life, and in

some cases lead to an explosion.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (289,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

.Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

.Keep the battery out of the reach of

children.

DI0137MA

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be

between the UPPER LEVEL *

1and LOWER

LEVEL *

2lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level to the indicator in each

filler opening. Do not overfill.

SDI1480C

1. Remove the cell plugs *

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL

1line.

If the side of the battery is not clear, check

the distilled water level by looking directly

above the cell; the condition *

1indicates

OK and the condition *

2needs more to be

added.

3. Tighten cell plugs *

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (290,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “JUMP

STARTING” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced.

Contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

.Do not ground accessories directly

to the battery terminal. Doing so will

bypass the variable voltage control

system and the vehicle battery may

not charge completely.

.Use electrical accessories with the

engine running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

The variable voltage control system measures

the amount of electrical discharge from the

battery and controls voltage generated by the

generator.

SDI1881

1. Alternator

2. Drive belt auto-tensioner

3. Crankshaft pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor

5. Water pump

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position before servicing drive

belts. The engine could rotate unex-

pectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is

in poor condition or loose, have it replaced

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM DRIVE BELT

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (291,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt condition checked regularly. WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch

are off and that the parking brake is

engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to

remove the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI2670

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer

for servicing.

Iridium platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the iridium

platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as

the conventional type spark plugs since they will

last much longer. Follow the maintenance log

shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide”. Do not reuse the iridium plati-

num-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or

regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with recom-

mended or equivalent ones.

SPARK PLUGS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (292,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI2667

To remove the filter, pull the air duct *

1upward

to remove it. Pull the tabs *

2, then pull the

cover *

3upward.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance

shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide”. When replacing the filter, wipe

the inside of the air cleaner housing and the

cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING

.Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or

others to be burned. The air cleaner

not only cleans the air, it stops

flame if the engine backfires. If it

is not there, and the engine back-

fires, you could be burned. Do not

drive with the air cleaner removed,

and be careful when working on the

engine with the air cleaner removed.

.Never pour fuel into the throttle

body or attempt to start the engine

with the air cleaner removed. Doing

so could result in serious injury.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form when

rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent.

Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your

windshield is still not clear after cleaning the

blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

AIR CLEANER WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (293,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI1803

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

Before replacing the wiper blades, the wiper

should be in the fully up position to avoid

scratching the engine hood or damaging the

wiper arm. To pull up the wiper arm, see

“WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push and hold the release tab *

A, and

move the wiper blade down the wiper arm

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until a click sounds.

4. Rotate the wiper blade so that the dimple is

in the groove.

CAUTION

.After wiper blade replacement, re-

turn the wiper arm to its original

position; otherwise it may be da-

maged when the hood is opened.

.Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arm may be

damaged from wind pressure.

SDI1865

Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle *

This may cause improper windshield washer

operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any

objects with a needle or small pin *

B.Be

careful not to damage the nozzle.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (294,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or

replacement is required.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the

brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake

system check if the brake pedal height

does not return to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will

first occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,

the sound will always be heard even if the brake

pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear warning

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise

may be heard. Occasional brake noise during

light to moderate stops is normal and does not

affect the function or performance of the brake

system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information, see the

maintenance log section of your “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE BRAKES

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (295,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI2654

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are turned off.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover by

pushing the tab *

1and lifting the cover

from the right side *

2, then the left side

4. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

5. Removethefuseusingthefusepuller

located in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

SDI1754

6. If the fuse is open *

A, replace it with a new

fuse *

7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

The holder *

4also contains the fuses. For

checking and/or replacing, see a NISSAN

dealer.

FUSES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (296,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI2642

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate and

the fuses are in good condition, check the

fusible links in the holders *

1and *

2. If any of

these fusible links are melted, replace only with

genuine NISSAN parts.

For checking and replacing the fusible links in

the holders *

2, see a NISSAN dealer.

SDI2643

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are turned off.

2. Remove the fuse box cover *

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller *

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (297,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI1754

4. If the fuse is open *

A, replace it with a new

fuse *

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to

swallow the battery and removed parts.

SDI2134

KEYFOB

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

1. Remove the screw.

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the

corner and twist it to separate the upper part

KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (298,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect

the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery:

CR1620 or equivalent

.Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

.Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

.Make sure that the +side faces the

bottom of the case.

4. Close the lid securely and install the screw.

5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance

for replacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

SDI2451

INTELLIGENT KEY

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as

follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the In-

telligent Key.

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (299,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the

corner and twist it to separate the upper part

from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect

the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery:

CR2025 or equivalent

.Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

.Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

.Make sure that the +side faces the

bottom of the case.

SDI2452

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts

1, and then push them together *

2until it

is securely closed.

5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance

for replacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (300,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI2640

1. Map light

2. Front side marker light

3. Front fog light (if so equipped)

4. Headlight (high-beam/low-beam)

5. Front turn signal light

6. Front park light

7. Side turn signal light

8. High-mounted stop light

9. Back-up light

10. Stop light

11. Rear turn signal/tail/rear side marker light

12. License plate light

13. Cargo light

LIGHTS

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (301,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

HEADLIGHTS

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is

not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Replacing

Halogen headlight model:

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which

uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.

CAUTION

.Do not leave the bulb out of the

headlight reflector for a long period

of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.

entering the headlight body may

affect bulb performance.

.High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb

may break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

.Only touch the base when handling

the bulb. Never touch the glass

envelope. Touching the glass envel-

ope could significantly affect bulb

life and/or headlight performance.

.Aiming is not necessary after repla-

cing the bulb. When aiming adjust-

ment is necessary, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

Use the same number and wattage as originally

installed as shown in the chart.

SDI2687

Disconnect the battery negative cable before

replacing bulbs.

1. Remove the connector.

2. Turn the holder *

Aand then pull out it.

Remove the cap *

Band then remove the

bulb *

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (302,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight high/low beams (Halogen) 65/55 HB5

Front turn signal light* 21 PY21W

Front fog light (if so equipped)* 35 H8

Front side marker* 3.8 194

Front park light 5 WY5W

Side turn signal light* 5 WY5W

Rear combination light*

stop light 21 W21W

turn signal/tail/rear side marker light 21/5 W21/5W

back-up 16 W16W

License plate light* 5 W5W

Map light 5 —

High-mounted stop light* LED —

Cargo light 5 —

*: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.

SDI2306

: REMOVE

: INSTALL

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D or E.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens

and/or cover.

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (303,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI2391

Map light

SDI2653

Cargo light

If you have a flat tire, see “FLAT TIRE” in

the “6. In case of emergency” section.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire

pressure of all tires except the spare. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or

more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop

in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning

light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section, “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure of the tires (including

the spare) often and always prior to long

distance trips. The recommended tire

pressure specifications are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label under

the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire

WHEELS AND TIRES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (304,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

and Loading Information label is affixed to

the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures

should be checked regularly because:

.Most tires naturally lose air over time.

.Tires can lose air suddenly when driven

over potholes or other objects or if the

vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect tire

life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

.Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

.The Gross Vehicle Weight rating

(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.

S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel. The vehicle weight capacity

is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do

not load your vehicle beyond

this capacity. Overloading your

vehicle may result in reduced

tire life, unsafe operating condi-

tions due to premature tire fail-

ure, or unfavorable handling

characteristics and could also

lead to a serious accident. Load-

ing beyond the specified capa-

city may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

.Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

.For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-

da) in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (305,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI2503

Tire and Loading Information label

1Seating capacity: The maximum num-

ber of occupants that can be seated

in the vehicle.

2Vehicle load limit: See “VEHICLE

LOADING INFORMATION” in the “9.

Technical and consumer information”

section.

3Original size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The

recommended cold tire inflation is set

by the manufacturer to provide the

best balance of tire wear, vehicle

handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

5Tire size — see “TIRE LABELING”

later in this section.

6Spare tire size or compact spare tire

size (if so equipped)

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

Information Provided by:

Black plate (306,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI1949

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto

the valve stem. Do not press too hard or

force the valve stem sideways, or air will

escape. If the hissing sound of air

escaping from the tire is heard while

checking the pressure, reposition the

gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare it to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of the

valve stem briefly with the tip of the

gauge stem to release pressure. Re-

check the pressure and add or release

air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

SIZE

COLD TIRE

INFLATION

PRESSURE

FRONT

ORIGINAL

TIRE

P215/55R17

93V

230 kPa,

33 PSI

(2WD MT

model)

250 kPa,

36 PSI

(2WD CVT

model)

240 kPa,

34 PSI

(AWD

model)

REAR

ORIGINAL

TIRE

P215/55R17

93V

230 kPa,

33 PSI

(2WD MT

model)

250 kPa,

36 PSI

(2WD CVT

model)

240 kPa,

34 PSI

(AWD

model)

SPARE

TIRE

T135/80D16

101M (2WD)

T135/90D16

102M (AWD)

420 kPa,

60 PSI

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (307,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI1575

Example

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the side-

wall of all tires. This information identifies

and describes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides the tire

identification number (TIN) for safety stan-

dard certification. The TIN can be used to

identify the tire in case of a recall.

SDI1606

Example

1Tire size (example: P215/60R16

94H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed

for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires

have this information.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This number

gives the width in millimeters of the tire

from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (60): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (16): This number is

the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight each

tire can support. You may not find this

information on all tires because it is not

required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

Information Provided by:

Black plate (308,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI1607

Example

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department

of Transportation”. The symbol can be

placed above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifi-

cation mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-

tional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

6. Four numbers represent the week and

year the tire was built. For example, the

numbers 3103 means the 31st week of

2003. If these numbers are missing,

then look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

4Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,

always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an

inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown, if the tire

has radial structure.

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model

name molding that is higher or deeper than

the same molding on the other sidewall of

the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular

side that must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (309,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

.When changing or replacing tires,

be sure all four tires are of the same

type (Example: Summer, All Season

or Snow) and construction. A

NISSAN dealer may be able to help

you with information about tire type,

size, speed rating and availability.

.Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.For additional information regard-

ing tires, refer to “Important Tire

Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some

models to provide good performance all year,

including snowy and icy road conditions. All

Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON

and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire

sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction

than All Season tires and may be more appro-

priate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance on dry

roads. Summer tire performance is substantially

reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not

have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire

sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or

icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speed

ratings than factory equipped tires and may not

match the potential maximum vehicle speed.

Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the

tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S. states

and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws before

installing studded tires. Skid and traction cap-

abilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry

surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-

studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according

to location. Check the local laws before instal-

ling tire chains. When installing tire chains, make

sure they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are

designed to meet the SAE standard minimum

clearances between the tire and the closest

vehicle suspension or body component required

to accommodate the use of a winter traction

device (tire chains or cables). The minimum

clearances are determined using the factory

equipped tire size. Other types may damage

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

Information Provided by:

Black plate (310,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-

commended by the tire chain manufacturer to

ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire

chain must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage to the

fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully

loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In

addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,

your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle

handling and performance may be adversely

affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

tire chains in such conditions can cause damage

to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

SDI1662

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). (See “FLAT

TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section for tire replacing procedures.)

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a

torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-

tened to the specification at all times.

It is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to the specification at each

tire rotation interval.

WARNING

.After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.

.Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

.Do not include the spare tire or

any other small size spare tire in

the tire rotation.

.For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-

da) in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (311,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

SDI1663

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

.Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bul-

ging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

.The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

.Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician, because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

.Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious perso-

nal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

.For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-

da) in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. (See “SPECIFICA-

TIONS” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section for recommended types

and sizes of tires and wheels.)

WARNING

.The use of tires other than those

recommended or the mixed use of

tires of different brands, construc-

tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), or

tread patterns can adversely affect

the ride, braking, handling, ground

clearance, body-to-tire clearance,

tire chain clearance, speedometer

calibration, headlight aim and bum-

per height. Some of these effects

may lead to accidents and could

result in serious personal injury.

.If the wheels are changed for any

reason, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear,

degrade vehicle handling character-

istics and/or interference with the

brake discs/drums. Such interfer-

ence can lead to decreased braking

efficiency and/or early brake pad/

shoe wear. See “WHEELS AND

TIRES” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section of

this manual for wheel off-set dimen-

sions.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

Information Provided by:

Black plate (312,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will

remain on after 1 minute. Contact

your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/

or system resetting.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.Do not install a damaged or de-

formed wheel or tire even if it has

been repaired. Such wheels or tires

could have structural damage and

could fail without warning.

.The use of retread tire is not re-

commended.

.For additional information regard-

ing tires, refer to “Important Tire

Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Booklet.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION

.Always use tires of the same size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted or radial), and tread pattern

on all four wheels. Failure to do so

may result in a circumference differ-

ence between tires on the front and

rear axles which will cause exces-

sive tire wear and may damage the

transmission, transfer case and rear

differential gears.

.Only use spare tires specified for

each AWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with tires

of the same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment

should also be checked and corrected as

necessary. Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can

get out of balance. Therefore, they should be

balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires, refer

to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War-

ranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

See “CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Ap-

pearance and care” section for details about

care of the wheels.

Spare tire

When a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY

USE ONLY), the TPMS will not function.

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used,

otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or

involved in an accident.

WARNING

.The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire should be used for emergency

use. It should be replaced with the

standard tire at the first opportunity

to avoid possible tire or differential

damage.

.Drive carefully while the TEMPOR-

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (313,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-

stalled. Avoid sharp turns and

abrupt braking while driving.

.Periodically check spare tire infla-

tion pressure. Always keep the

pressure of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa,

4.2 bar).

.With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire installed do not drive your

vehicle at speeds faster than 50

MPH (80 km/h).

.When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on

the rear wheels and original tire

used on the front wheels (drive

wheels). Use tire chains only on

the front (original) tires.

.Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster

rate than the standard tire. Replace

the spare tire as soon as the tread

wear indicators appear.

.Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

.Do not use more than one spare tire

at the same time.

.Do not tow a trailer when the

TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

is installed.

CAUTION

.Do not use tire chains on a TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire

chains will not fit properly and may

cause damage to the vehicle.

.Because the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire is smaller than the

original tire, ground clearance is

reduced. To avoid damage to the

vehicle, do not drive over obstacles.

Also do not drive the vehicle

through an automatic car wash

since it may get caught.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

Information Provided by:

Black plate (314,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

MEMO

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (28,1)

9 Technical and consumer information

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ............ 9-2

Fuel recommendation ...................................... 9-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation............... 9-5

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant

recommendations........................................... 9-6

Specifications.................................................... 9-7

Engine......................................................... 9-7

Wheels and tires............................................ 9-7

Dimensions and weights .................................. 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country.................................................. 9-8

Vehicle identification ........................................... 9-8

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ............. 9-8

Vehicle identification number (chassis number)...... 9-9

Engine serial number ...................................... 9-9

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ............... 9-9

Emission control information label .................... 9-10

Tire and loading information label..................... 9-10

Air conditioner specification label ..................... 9-10

Installing front license plate ................................ 9-11

Vehicle loading information ................................. 9-12

Terms ........................................................ 9-12

Vehicle load capacity .................................... 9-13

Loading tips................................................ 9-15

Measurement of weights ................................ 9-15

Towing a trailer ................................................ 9-15

Flat towing ..................................................... 9-16

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) .......... 9-16

Manual Transmission ..................................... 9-16

Uniform tire quality grading................................. 9-16

Treadwear .................................................. 9-16

Traction AA, A, B and C ................................ 9-16

Temperature A, B and C ................................ 9-17

Emission control system warranty......................... 9-17

Reporting safety defects (US only) ....................... 9-18

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test...... 9-19

Event Data Recorders (EDR) .............................. 9-19

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information .. . 9-20

In the event of a collision ............................... 9-20

Information Provided by:

Black plate (316,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 2/ 21

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended specifications

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 2WD model 13-1/4 gal 11 gal 50 See “FUEL RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.

AWD model 11-7/8 gal 9-7/8 gal 45

Engine oil*1

Drain and refill

With oil filter change 4-3/4 qt 4 qt 4.5 .Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2

.Viscosity SAE 5W-30

Without oil filter change 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3

Cooling system

With reservoir CVT model 8-5/8 qt 7-1/8 qt 8.1

Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalentMT model 8-3/8 qt 7 qt 7.9

Reservoir 5/8 qt 1/2 qt 0.6

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2*3

Manual Transmission (MT) gear oil — — — API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-80

Differential gear oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity

SAE 80W-90*4

Transfer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity

SAE 80W-90

Brake and clutch fluid Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*6

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R or exact equivalent

Window washer fluid 1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

*1: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.

*2: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.

*3: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle

limited warranty.

*4: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 328F(08C).

*5: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.

*6: For additional information, see “VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (317,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded

premium gasoline with an octane rating of at

least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re-

search octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI number

(Research octane number 91), but you may

notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

.Using a fuel other than that speci-

fied could adversely affect the emis-

sion control system, and may also

affect warranty coverage.

.Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three-way cat-

alyst.

.Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run

on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can

damage the fuel system compo-

nents and is not covered by the

NISSAN new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) speci-

fications where it is available. Many of the

automobile manufacturers developed this spe-

cification to improve emission control system

and vehicle performance. Ask your service

station manager if the gasoline meets the

WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-

mulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-

nol with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels

of which the oxygenate content and the fuel

compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily

determined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

.The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

.If an oxygenate-blend, other than

methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

.If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not

available to ensure that all methanol

blends are suitable for use in NISSAN

vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine

stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced

after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately

change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during

refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (318,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern-

ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square,

orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel

injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve

deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commer-

cially. Many of these additives intended for gum,

varnish or deposit removal may contain active

solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful

to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock”. (Spark

knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If

severe, this can lead to engine damage. If

you detect a persistent heavy spark knock

even when using gasoline of the stated

octane rating, or if you hear steady spark

knock while holding a steady speed on

level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct

the condition. Failure to correct the condi-

tion is misuse of the vehicle, for which

NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in spark

knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may

cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are

encountered, have your vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

CAUTION

.Your vehicle is not designed to run

on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a

vehicle not specifically designed for

E-85 fuel can damage fuel system

components and is not covered by

the NISSAN new vehicle limited

warranty.

.E-85 is a mixture of approximately

85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded

gasoline.

.U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be

identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate per-

centage for that region.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (319,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

STI0505

1. API certification mark

2. API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE-

COMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance, see

“CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/

LUBRICANTS” earlier in this section. NISSAN

recommends the use of an energy conserving oil

in order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API

certification mark on the front of the container.

Oils which do not have the specified quality

label should not be used as they could cause

engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used and

maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has

been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

to select the engine oil viscosity based on the

temperatures at which the vehicle will be

operated before the next oil change. Choosing

an oil viscosity other than that recommended

could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals”.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using an engine oil and

filter other than the specified quality, or exceed-

ing recommended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine

caused by improper maintenance or use of

incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is

not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited

warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

Technical and consumer information 9-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (320,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes.

.repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures

.driving in dusty conditions

.extensive idling

.stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-

FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-

COMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the

refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil,

NISSAN A/C system oil Type R or the exact

equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil

will cause severe damage to the air

conditioning system and will require

the replacement of all air conditioner

system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect

the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental

regulations require the recovery and recycling of

any refrigerant during automotive air condition-

ing system service. A NISSAN dealer has the

trained technicians and equipment needed to

recover and recycle your air conditioning system

refrigerant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your

air conditioning system.

9-6 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (321,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

ENGINE

Model MR16DDT

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, in-line

Bore 6Stroke in (mm) 3.138 63.193 (79.7 681.1)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 98.78 (1,618)

Firing order 1-3-4-2

Idle speed rpm No adjustment is necessary.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

Spark plug Standard DILKAR7C9H

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.035 (0.9)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum 17 67J 1.85 (47)

Spare 16 64T 1.18 (30)

Tire

Type Size Pressure PSI

(kPa) [Cold]

Conventional P215/55R17

93V

33 (230)*1

36 (250)*2

34 (240)*3

Spare

T135/80D16

101M*1*2

60 (420)

T135/90D16

102M*3

*1: 2WD MT model

*2: 2WD CVT model

*3: AWD model

SPECIFICATIONS

Technical and consumer information 9-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (322,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2011/ 2/ 21

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 162.8 (4,135)*1

162.4 (4,125)*2

Overall width in (mm) 69.5 (1,765)

Overall height in (mm) 61.8 (1,570)

Front tread in (mm) 60.0 (1,525)

Rear tread in (mm) 60.0 (1,525)*3

59.3 (1,505)*4

Wheelbase in (mm) 99.6 (2,530)

Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating

(GVWR)

lb (kg)

See the F.M.V.S.S. or

C.M.V.S.S. certification

label on the driver’s

side center pillar.

Gross Axle

Weight Rating

(GAWR)

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

*1: With front license plate bracket

*2: Without front license plate bracket

*3: for 2WD model

*4: for AWD model

When planning to travel in another coun-

try, you should first find out if the fuel available is

suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low

may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline.

Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas

where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards vary

according to the country, state, province or

district; therefore, vehicle specifications may

differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into

another country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, transpor-

tation, and registration are the responsi-

bility of the user. NISSAN is not

responsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

STI0787

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is at-

tached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

WHEN TRAVELING OR

REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN

ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

9-8 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (323,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 29

STI0778

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

Remove the cover to access the number.

STI0785

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

STI0814

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification

label is affixed as shown. This label contains

valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross

Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of

manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

Technical and consumer information 9-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (324,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

STI0774

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

STI0775

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as

shown.

STI0776

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is at-

tached to the engine compartment as shown.

9-10 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (325,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

STI0784

Use the following steps to mount the license

plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that

the following parts are enclosed in the plastic

bag.

.License plate bracket

.J-nut 62

.Screw 62

.Screw grommet 62

1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.

2. Locate the center position *

Aas illustrated.

Make sure the side end surface of the

license plate bracket is aligned with the

bumper *

3. Mark the center of the holes *

Cwith a felt-

tip pen.

4. Carefully drill the two pilot holes using a

0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked

locations. (Be sure that the drill only

goes through the bumper fascia.)

5. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.

6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the

grommet hole to add a 908turn onto the

part *

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Technical and consumer information 9-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (326,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

before placing the license plate bracket on

the fascia.

8. Install the license plate bracket with the

screws.

9. Install the license plate with bolts that are

not longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING

.It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside the vehi-

cle. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

.Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

.Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the

following terms before loading your vehicle:

.Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment,

fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

.GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

.GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

- maximum total combined weight of the

unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,

hitch, trailer tongue load and any other

optional equipment. This information is

located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

label.

.GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.

S.S. label.

.GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rat-

ing) - The maximum total weight rating

of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and

trailer.

.Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle.

This is the maximum combined weight

of occupants and cargo that can be

loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is

used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue

weight must be included as part of the

cargo load. This information is located

on the Tire and Loading Information

label.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

9-12 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (327,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

.Cargo capacity - permissible weight of

cargo, the subtracted weight of occu-

pants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle

shown as “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading

Information label. Do not exceed the

number of occupants shown as “Seating

Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label.

To get “the combined weight of occupants

and cargo”, add the weight of all occu-

pants, then add the total luggage weight.

Examples are shown in the following

illustration.

Technical and consumer information 9-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (328,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

STI0447

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on

your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding

in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the XXX

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will

be five 150 lb. passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 −750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or

(640 −340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in Step 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

(See “MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS”

later in this section.)

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. See the Tire and Loading Information

label.

9-14 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (329,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

LOADING TIPS

.The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./

C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

.Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

.Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

.Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This

could result in loss of control

and cause personal injury.

.Overloading not only can short-

en the life of your vehicle and

the tire, but can cause unsafe

vehicle handling and longer

braking distances. This may

cause a premature tire failure,

which could result in a serious

accident and personal injury.

Failures caused by overloading

are not covered by the vehicle’s

warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts

that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive

to a scale and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine axle loads.

Individual axle loads should not exceed

either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings

(GAWR). The total of the axle loads should

not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given

on the vehicle certification label. If weight

ratings are exceeded, move or remove

items to bring all weights below the ratings.

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

TOWING A TRAILER

Technical and consumer information 9-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (330,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a

vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a

motor home.

CAUTION

.Failure to follow these guidelines

can result in severe transmission

damage.

.Whenever flat towing your vehicle,

always tow forward, never back-

ward.

.DO NOT tow any Continuously Vari-

able Transmission (CVT) vehicle

with all four wheels on the ground

(flat towing). Doing so WILL DA-

MAGE internal transmission parts

due to lack of transmission lubrica-

tion.

.DO NOT tow an All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) vehicle with any of the

wheels on the ground. Doing so

may cause serious and expensive

damage to the powertrain.

.For emergency towing procedures

refer to “TOWING YOUR VEHICLE”

in the “6. In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-

MISSION (CVT)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models:

Do not tow an AWD vehicle with any of the

wheels on the ground.

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models:

To tow a vehicle equipped with a Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT), an appropriate

vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed

vehicle’s driving wheels. Always follow the dolly

manufacturer’s recommendations when using

their product.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

.Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

.Your vehicle speed should never exceed 70

MPH (112 km/h) when flat towing your

vehicle.

.After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and

idle the engine with the transmission in

Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle the

engine after every 500 miles (805 km) of

towing may cause damage to the transmis-

sion’s internal parts.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one-half

(1 1/2) times as well on the government course

as a tire graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon actual conditions of their

use, however, and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road char-

acteristics and climate.

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

FLAT TOWING UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

9-16 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (331,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include

acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C

The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and

C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions on

a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-

tained high temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent

higher levels of performance on the laboratory

test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN is covered by the following

emission warranties.

For US:

.Emission Defects Warranty

.Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-

formation Booklet which comes with your

NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty

Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you

may obtain a replacement by writing to:

.Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN. If you

did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet,

or it has become lost, you may obtain a

replacement by writing to:

.Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario,

L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

Technical and consumer information 9-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (332,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Ad-

ministrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,

SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can

also obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately

inform Transport Canada in addition to

notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may request that NISSAN

conduct a recall campaign. However,

Transport Canada cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your

dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-

fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll

free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also

report safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/

PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

Additional information concerning motor

vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-

port Canada’s Road Safety Information

Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-

ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns

please contact our Consumer Information

Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US

only)

9-18 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (333,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

should never be tested using a two wheel

dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used

by some states for emissions testing), or similar

equipment. Make sure you inform test facility

personnel that your vehicle is equipped with

AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may result in

transmission damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in serious vehicle

damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states/areas

or provinces, your vehicle may be required to be

in what is called the “ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-

sion control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when

it is driven through certain driving patterns.

Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained

by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking

the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/

maintenance test readiness condition. Place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and

then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”.

Contact a NISSAN dealer to set “ready condi-

tion” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is

to record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems

for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

.How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

.Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

.How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

.How fast the vehicle was traveling.

.Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which crashes

and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data

are recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g. name,

gender, age and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce-

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Technical and consumer information 9-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (334,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

ment, could combine the EDR data with the type

of personally identifying data routinely acquired

during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the vehicle

or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will

only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for your

vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the

factory trained technicians working at a NISSAN

dealer. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can

also be purchased.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals contact:

1-800-450-9491

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals contact:

1-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this

model year and prior please contact a NISSAN

dealer. For the phone number and location of a

NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN

Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a

bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this

unlikely event, there is some important informa-

tion you should know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorize

the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to

cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN

Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using

parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting

specifications — if you want to help it to last

and hold its resale value, the solution is simple.

Tell your insurance agent and your repair

shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Colli-

sion Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-

NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN’s warranty

apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect

your personal safety, preserve your warranty

protection and maintain the resale value of your

vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit

unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at

the end of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones

to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate

the windshield of your vehicle in an accident.

Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide

such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine

parts often show premature wear, rust and

corrosion.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

9-20 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (335,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be

advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair

your vehicle. And some states have enacted

laws that restrict insurance companies from

authorizing the use of non-genuine collision

parts during the new vehicle warranty. These

laws help protect you, so you can take action to

protect yourself.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

Technical and consumer information 9-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (336,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

MEMO

9-22 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (1,1)

10 Index

A/C (Air Conditioner) operation .................. 4-15

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).................. 5-36

Advanced air bag system ......................... 1-41

Air bag system

Advanced air bag system ..................... 1-41

Front passenger air bag and status light .... 1-42

Front-seat mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system.................. 1-45

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag system.................. 1-45

Air bag warning labels............................. 1-48

Air bag warning light ....................... 1-48, 2-15

Air cleaner housing filter .......................... 8-16

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ...................... 4-14

Air conditioner service......................... 4-21

Air conditioner specification label ............ 9-10

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations .............. 4-21, 9-6

In-cabin microfilter ............................. 4-20

Alarm, How to stop alarm

(see vehicle security system) ..................... 2-29

Alcohol, drugs and driving .......................... 5-7

All-wheel drive (AWD)............................. 5-29

Antenna............................................. 4-50

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................. 5-36

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light . . . 2-12

Appearance care

Exterior appearance care........................ 7-2

Interior appearance care ........................ 7-4

Audible reminders ................................. 2-18

Audio operation precautions ...................... 4-21

Audio setup .......................................... 4-5

Audio system....................................... 4-21

Steering wheel audio controls ................ 4-49

Autolight system ................................... 2-34

Automatic

Air conditioner. ................................. 4-18

Door locks........................................ 3-6

Moonroof ....................................... 2-47

AUX (Auxiliary) button ...................... 4-40, 4-44

Average fuel consumption........................... 2-9

Avoiding collision and rollover ...................... 5-5

Back door (See lift gate) .......................... 3-22

Battery .............................................. 8-12

Battery replacement, Intelligent Key .......... 8-22

Battery replacement, Keyfob .................. 8-21

Battery saver system .......................... 2-35

Variable voltage control system............... 8-14

Before starting the engine ........................ 5-14

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System .......... 4-52

Booster seats ...................................... 1-31

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).............. 5-36

Brake and clutch fluid ......................... 8-11

Brake system................................... 5-35

Parking brake operation ....................... 5-26

Warning light ................................... 2-12

Break-in schedule.................................. 5-28

Brightness control

Display ON/OFF button ......................... 4-5

Instrument panel ............................... 2-36

Bulb check/instrument panel...................... 2-11

Bulb replacement .................................. 8-24

Cabin air filter ...................................... 4-20

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ..... 9-2

Car phone or CB radio............................ 4-51

Cargo cover ........................................ 2-43

Cargo floor box .................................... 2-42

Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ............ 5-2

CD/USB memory care and cleaning ............. 4-48

Child restraints ..................................... 1-18

Booster seats .................................. 1-31

LATCH system ................................. 1-19

Precautions on child restraints................ 1-18

Child safety......................................... 1-16

Child safety rear door lock .......................... 3-6

Chimes, Audible reminders ....................... 2-18

Circuit breaker, Fusible link ....................... 8-20

Cleaning exterior and interior ................. 7-2, 7-4

Clock ............................................... 2-40

Clock (models with navigation system) ............ 4-7

Clutch fluid ......................................... 8-11

Coat hook .......................................... 2-43

Cockpit ............................................... 2-2

Cold weather driving .............................. 5-39

Compact Disc (CD) player

(See audio system) ......................... 4-36, 4-42

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid ................................................. 8-11

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Information Provided by:

Black plate (2,1)

10-2

Control panel buttons — color screen with

navigation system .................................... 4-2

Controls, Steering wheel audio controls ......... 4-49

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................................... 9-2

Changing engine coolant........................ 8-8

Checking engine coolant level .................. 8-7

Corrosion protection................................. 7-6

Cover, Cargo cover................................ 2-43

Cruise control ...................................... 5-26

Cup holders ........................................ 2-41

CVT, Driving with CVT

(Continuously Variable Transmission)........5-9, 5-16

Daytime running light system ..................... 2-35

Defroster switch, Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch ............................ 2-33

Dimensions and weights ............................ 9-8

Displaying Climate control ........................ 4-20

Door open warning light........................... 2-13

Drive belt ........................................... 8-14

Driving

All-wheel drive (AWD)......................... 5-29

Cold weather driving .......................... 5-39

Driving with CVT

(Continuously Variable Transmission)....5-9, 5-16

Driving with manual transmission ...... 5-10, 5-20

Precautions when starting and driving ......... 5-2

Safety precautions ............................... 5-7

Economy, Fuel ..................................... 5-29

Elapsed time .................................. 2-9, 2-25

Electric power steering system ................... 5-34

Electric power steering warning light ............ 2-13

Emission control information label ................ 9-10

Emission control system warranty ................ 9-17

Engine

Before starting the engine .................... 5-14

Break-in schedule.............................. 5-28

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................................... 9-2

Changing engine coolant........................ 8-8

Changing engine oil and filter................... 8-8

Checking engine coolant level .................. 8-7

Checking engine oil level........................ 8-8

Coolant temperature gauge ..................... 2-6

Engine block heater ........................... 5-40

Engine compartment check locations .......... 8-6

Engine cooling system .......................... 8-7

Engine oil ......................................... 8-8

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ....... 9-5

Engine oil viscosity .............................. 9-5

Engine serial number ............................ 9-9

Engine specifications ............................ 9-7

If your vehicle overheats......................... 6-9

Starting the engine ............................ 5-14

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ..................... 9-19

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) .................... 5-2

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ........... 9-9

Filter

Air cleaner housing filter ...................... 8-16

Changing engine oil and filter................... 8-8

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . 2-37

Flat tire................................................ 6-2

Flat towing.......................................... 9-16

Floor mat cleaning ................................... 7-5

Fluid

Brake and clutch fluid ......................... 8-11

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................................... 9-2

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid ............................................. 8-11

Engine coolant ................................... 8-7

Engine oil ......................................... 8-8

Window washer fluid .......................... 8-12

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc

(CD) player .................................. 4-33, 4-41

Fog light switch .................................... 2-37

Front manual seat adjustment. ...................... 1-3

Front passenger air bag and status light ........ 1-42

Front seat, Front seat adjustment .................. 1-3

Front-seat active head restraints ................... 1-7

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................................... 9-2

Distance to empty ............................... 2-9

Fuel economy .................................. 5-29

Fuel octane rating................................ 9-3

Fuel recommendation............................ 9-3

Fuel-filler cap................................... 3-23

Fuel-filler door.................................. 3-23

Gauge ............................................ 2-7

Fuses ............................................... 8-19

Fusible links ........................................ 8-20

Gas cap............................................ 3-23

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Information Provided by:

Black plate (3,1)

Gauge ................................................ 2-4

Engine coolant temperature gauge ............. 2-6

Fuel gauge ....................................... 2-7

Odometer......................................... 2-5

Speedometer..................................... 2-5

Tachometer ....................................... 2-6

Trip computer .................................... 2-8

General maintenance ................................ 8-2

Glove box. .......................................... 2-43

Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth®.......... 4-52

Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 2-37

Head restraints....................................... 1-4

Headlights

Bulb replacement .............................. 8-25

Headlight switch ............................... 2-34

Heated seats ....................................... 2-39

Heater

Engine block heater ........................... 5-40

Heater and air conditioner operation ......... 4-14

Hood release....................................... 3-21

Horn ................................................ 2-38

How to use the back button ........................ 4-5

How to use the setup button ....................... 4-5

Ignition switch

(with Intelligent Key system) .................. 5-11

(without Intelligent Key system)................. 5-9

Key positions ................................... 5-10

Immobilizer system................................. 2-29

In-cabin microfilter ................................. 4-20

Indicator lights ..................................... 2-16

Inside mirror ........................................ 3-26

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ................ 9-19

Instrument brightness control ..................... 2-36

Instrument panel ..................................... 2-3

Integrated control system .................. 2-19, 5-22

Intelligent Key system ............................. 3-10

Intelligent Key system warning light .......... 2-13

Key operating range ........................... 3-12

Key operation .................................. 3-13

P position selecting warning light ............ 2-15

Remote keyless operation..................... 3-17

Interior light replacement .......................... 8-26

Interior lights ....................................... 2-48

iPod®connecting .................................. 4-38

iPod®player operation............................. 4-46

ISOFIX child restraint.............................. 1-19

Jump starting ......................................... 6-7

Keyless entry

(See remote keyless entry system) ............. 3-7

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system) .................. 3-17

Keys................................................... 3-2

For Intelligent Key system ..................... 3-10

Labels

Air bag warning labels......................... 1-48

Air conditioner specification label ............ 9-10

Emission control information label ............ 9-10

Engine serial number ............................ 9-9

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ....... 9-9

Tire and Loading information label .... 8-29, 9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ............. 9-8

LATCH system ..................................... 1-19

License plate, Installing front license plate. ...... 9-11

Lift gate............................................. 3-22

Light

Air bag warning light .......................... 1-48

Bulb replacement .............................. 8-24

Fog light switch ................................ 2-37

Headlight switch ............................... 2-34

Headlights bulb replacement ................. 8-25

Indicator lights ................................. 2-16

Interior lights ................................... 2-48

Map lights ...................................... 2-49

Replacement ................................... 8-24

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................................... 2-12

Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement . . . 8-26

Loading information

(See vehicle loading information) ................. 9-12

Lock

Automatic door locks ............................ 3-6

Door locks........................................ 3-4

Lift gate lock ................................... 3-22

Power door lock ................................. 3-4

Low fuel warning light ............................. 2-14

Low tire pressure warning light ................... 2-14

Low tire pressure warning system (See tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) .............. 5-3

10-3

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Information Provided by:

Black plate (4,1)

10-4

Maintenance

Battery .......................................... 8-12

General maintenance ............................ 8-2

Inside the vehicle ................................ 8-3

Maintenance precautions........................ 8-5

Maintenance requirements ...................... 8-2

Outside the vehicle .............................. 8-2

Seat belt maintenance......................... 1-16

Malfunction indicator light (MIL) .................. 2-17

Manual air conditioner ............................. 4-14

Manual front seat adjustment ....................... 1-3

Map lights .......................................... 2-49

Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system)............ 3-4

Meter

Trip computer .................................... 2-8

Meters and gauges .................................. 2-4

Instrument brightness control ................. 2-36

Mirror

Inside mirror .................................... 3-26

Outside mirrors ................................ 3-26

Vanity mirror .................................... 3-27

Monitor, Rearview monitor .......................... 4-9

Moonroof ........................................... 2-47

Navigation setup ..................................... 4-6

New vehicle break-in .............................. 5-28

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ............. 2-29

Odometer............................................. 2-5

Off-road recovery .................................... 5-5

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................................... 9-2

Changing engine oil and filter................... 8-8

Checking engine oil level........................ 8-8

Engine oil ......................................... 8-8

Engine oil viscosity .............................. 9-5

Outside air temperature display .................... 2-8

Outside mirrors .................................... 3-26

Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ................. 6-9

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information.......................................... 9-20

Panic alarm.................................... 3-8, 3-18

Parking

Brake break-in.................................. 5-35

Parking brake operation ....................... 5-26

Parking on hills................................. 5-33

Phone

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System ...... 4-52

Car phone or CB radio........................ 4-51

Power

Electric power steering system ............... 5-34

Power door lock ................................. 3-4

Power outlet.................................... 2-41

Power windows ................................ 2-44

Precautions

Audio operation ................................ 4-21

Braking precautions ........................... 5-35

Child restraints ................................. 1-18

Cruise control .................................. 5-26

Driving safety..................................... 5-7

Maintenance...................................... 8-5

Seat belt usage ................................ 1-10

Supplemental restraint system ................ 1-35

When starting and driving....................... 5-2

Push starting ......................................... 6-9

Push-button ignition switch ................ 5-11, 5-12

Radio ............................................... 4-21

Car phone or CB radio........................ 4-51

Radio operation ................................ 4-34

Steering wheel audio controls ................ 4-49

Rapid air pressure loss .............................. 5-6

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)

test.................................................. 9-19

Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock........ 3-6

Rear seats ............................................ 1-4

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch............................................... 2-33

Rear window wiper and washer switch .......... 2-32

Rearview monitor .................................... 4-9

Recorders, Event data............................. 9-19

Registering your vehicle in another country........ 9-8

Remote keyless entry function, For Intelligent

Key system ......................................... 3-17

Remote keyless entry system ....................... 3-7

Reporting safety defects (US only)............... 9-18

Rollover ............................................... 5-5

Roof, Moonroof .................................... 2-47

Safety

Child seat belts ................................ 1-16

Reporting safety defects (US only)........... 9-18

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Information Provided by:

Black plate (5,1)

Satellite radio operation ........................... 4-41

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment. .................. 1-3

Front seats ....................................... 1-3

Seat belt(s)

Child safety..................................... 1-16

Infants........................................... 1-17

Injured persons................................. 1-13

Larger children ................................. 1-17

Precautions on seat belt usage............... 1-10

Pregnant women ............................... 1-13

Seat belt cleaning ............................... 7-6

Seat belt extenders ............................ 1-16

Seat belt hooks ................................ 1-15

Seat belt maintenance......................... 1-16

Seat belt warning light ........................ 2-15

Seat belts ...................................... 1-10

Seat belts with pretensioners................. 1-47

Shoulder belt height adjustment.............. 1-15

Small children .................................. 1-17

Three-point type ............................... 1-13

Seat(s)

Heated seats ................................... 2-39

Seats.............................................. 1-2

Security system, Vehicle security system ........ 2-28

Security system

(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

Engine start ........................................ 2-29

Selector lever

Shift lock release .............................. 5-19

Servicing air conditioner........................... 4-21

Setting climate eco ................................ 4-20

Shift lock release

Transmission ................................... 5-19

Shifting

CVT (Continuously Variable

Transmission).............................. 5-9, 5-16

Manual transmission .................... 5-10, 5-20

Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front

seats ................................................ 1-15

SOURCE select switch ........................... 4-49

Spare tire ...................................... 8-36, 9-7

Spark plugs ........................................ 8-15

Speedometer......................................... 2-5

Starting

Before starting the engine .................... 5-14

Jump starting ..................................... 6-7

Precautions when starting and driving ......... 5-2

Push starting ..................................... 6-9

Starting the engine ............................ 5-14

Status light, Front passenger air bag ............ 1-42

Steering

Electric power steering system ............... 5-34

Steering wheel switch for audio controls .... 4-49

Tilting steering column ........................ 3-25

Storage ............................................. 2-41

Sun visors .......................................... 3-25

Supplemental air bag warning labels............. 1-48

Supplemental air bag warning light ....... 1-48, 2-15

Supplemental restraint system .................... 1-35

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system .......................................... 1-35

Switch

Audio control steering wheel switch ......... 4-49

Autolight switch ................................ 2-34

Fog light switch ................................ 2-37

Hazard warning flasher switch ................ 2-37

Headlight switch ............................... 2-34

Power door lock switch ......................... 3-5

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch........................................... 2-33

Turn signal switch.............................. 2-37

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . . 2-38

System setup ........................................ 4-6

Tachometer ........................................... 2-6

Temperature display ................................. 2-8

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant

temperature gauge................................... 2-6

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

Engine start ........................................ 2-29

Three-way catalyst ................................... 5-2

Tilt steering column................................ 3-25

Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warning

light ................................................. 2-14

Tires

Flat tire............................................ 6-2

Low tire pressure warning system.............. 5-3

Tire and Loading information label .... 8-29, 9-10

Tire chains...................................... 8-33

Tire dressing ..................................... 7-3

Tire pressure ................................... 8-27

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) ..................................... 5-3, 6-2

Tire rotation .................................... 8-34

Types of tires ................................... 8-33

Uniform tire quality grading ................... 9-16

Wheel/tire size ................................... 9-7

Wheels and tires............................... 8-27

Tonneau cover (see cargo cover)................. 2-43

Touch screen......................................... 4-3

10-5

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Information Provided by:

Black plate (6,1)

10-6

Towing

Flat towing...................................... 9-16

Tow truck towing............................... 6-10

Towing a trailer................................. 9-15

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system ........... 5-3

TPMS, Tire pressure warning system .............. 6-2

Traffic setup .......................................... 4-8

Trailer towing ....................................... 9-15

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid ............................................. 8-11

Driving with CVT

(Continuously Variable Transmission)....5-9, 5-16

Driving with manual transmission ...... 5-10, 5-20

Transmission selector lever lock release ..... 5-19

Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system).... 3-7

Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system) ...................... 3-17

Traveling or registering your vehicle in another

country................................................ 9-8

Trip computer ........................................ 2-8

Turn signal switch.................................. 2-37

Underbody cleaning ................................. 7-3

Uniform tire quality grading ....................... 9-16

USB memory operation ........................... 4-45

Vanity mirror ........................................ 3-27

Variable voltage control system................... 8-14

Vehicle

Dimensions and weights ........................ 9-8

Identification number (VIN)...................... 9-8

Information display ............................... 2-8

Loading information............................ 9-12

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)............ 6-13

Security system ................................ 2-28

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . . 2-38

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system ...... 5-37

Ventilators .......................................... 4-13

Voice command

(Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System)......... 4-58

Warning

Hazard warning flasher switch ................ 2-37

Lights ........................................... 2-12

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) ..................................... 5-3, 6-2

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................................... 2-11

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .......... 1-48

Warning light

Air bag warning light ................... 1-48, 2-15

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning

light ............................................. 2-12

AWD warning light ............................ 5-32

Brake warning light ............................ 2-12

Door open warning light....................... 2-13

Electric power steering warning light ........ 2-13

Intelligent Key system warning light .......... 2-13

Low fuel warning light ......................... 2-14

Low tire pressure warning light ............... 2-14

Seat belt warning light ........................ 2-15

Warranty, Emission control system warranty..... 9-17

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer switch ...... 2-32

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-31

Washing .............................................. 7-2

Waxing................................................ 7-2

Weights (See dimensions and weights) ........... 9-8

Wheel/tire size ....................................... 9-7

Wheels and tires................................... 8-27

Care of wheels................................... 7-3

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ................ 7-3

Window washer fluid .............................. 8-12

Window(s)

Cleaning .......................................... 7-3

Power windows ................................ 2-44

Windshield wiper and washer switch ............ 2-31

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer switch ...... 2-32

Rear window wiper blade ..................... 8-18

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-31

Wiper blades................................... 8-16

XM setup ............................................. 4-6

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Information Provided by:

Black plate (7,1)

MEMO

10-7

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

Information Provided by:

Black plate (2,1)

Model "F15-D" EDITED: 2010/ 6/ 24

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded

premium gasoline with an octane rating of at

least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re-

search octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI number

(Research octane number 91), but you may

notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

.Using a fuel other than that speci-

fied could adversely affect the emis-

sion control systems, and may also

affect warranty coverage.

.Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, since this

will damage the three way catalyst.

.Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run

on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can

damage the fuel system compo-

nents and is not covered by the

NISSAN new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

For additional information, see “CAPACITIES

AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS”

in the “9. Technical and consumer information”

section.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

.Engine oil with API Certification Mark

.Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section for engine oil and

oil filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For

additional information, see “WHEELS AND

TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-

DURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of

vehicle use, follow the recommendations out-

lined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s

Manual. Follow these recommendations for the

future reliability and economy of your new

vehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Information Provided by:

2011 Nissan Juke Owner's Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation